Home

Pioneer SX-LX70SW Home Theater System User Manual

Contents

1. Time From DV output y DV camcorder e Use a DV cable not supplied to connect the DV jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV IN jack of this recorder Recorder connections Connecting a USB device Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can connect USB devices such as digital cameras printers keyboards and PCs Please also see the instructions that came with the device you want to connect before using 79 e Type A aT dt Digital Camera PictBridge compatible Printer Ed d Keyboard A Important e Some USB devices may not work with this recorder When connecting a PC to this unit make sure the power is turned off on both the PC and this unit when you connect them via USB We recommend connecting USB devices when this recorder is switched off in standby JPEG file storage devices Digital still camera Memory card reader any type of memory card e USB memory The Mass Storage Class MSC device should be FAT compatible Note that if the device is partitioned this recorder may not recognize it The Picture Transfer Protocol PTP can be used to transfer up to a maximum of 4000 files WMA MP3 file storage devices Memory card reader any type of memory card e USB memory e PC Use Connect
2. D3 4 2 1 1 En A WARNING WARNING This equipment is not waterproof To prevent a fire Before plugging in for the first time read the following or shock hazard do not place any container filled section carefully with liquid near this equipment such as a vase or The voltage of the available power supply differs flower pot or expose it to dripping splashing rain according to country or region Be sure that the or moisture D3 4 2 13 B En power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage e g 230 V or 120 V written on the ear face D3 4 2 1 4 A En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity 5 C to 35 C 41 F to 95 F less than 85 RH WARNING cooling vents not blocked Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight or strong artificial light D3 4 2 1 7 _A_En To prevent a fire hazard do not place any naked flame sources such as a lighted candle on the equipment D3 4 2 1 7a_A_En This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive WARNING 2006 95 EC and EMC Directive 2004 108 EC To prevent injury the receiver subwoofer must be D3 4 2 1 0a A En securely attached to the floor in accordance with this operating instructions CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1
3. Set to On to prevent accidental recording editing or erasing of the disc loaded If you need to unlock the disc to make edits select Off DVD RW Auto Initialize DVD RW e Default setting VR Mode Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD RW You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc See DVD RW Auto Initialize on page 102 for detailed instructions Initialize settings DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD RAM You can initialize a recordable DVD R RW disc for either VR mode or Video mode recording The first time you load a new DVD RW disc it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD RW Auto Init setting in the Disc Setup menu see page 102 New DVD R discs are ready for Video mode recording when you load them but it is also possible to initialize them for VR mode recording 1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re initialize the disc for Video mode recording Also once recorded in Video mode the disc cannot be re initialized for VR mode recording ED The Disc Setup menu DVD RW and DVD RAM discs can also be initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc When initializing a DVD RAM disc select VR mode See nitializing recordable DVD discs on page 102 for detailed instructions Finalize settings Finalize DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW Finalizing fixes the recording
4. Front center speaker R Surround speaker R AY warnine e Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents resulting from faulty assembly or installation insufficient mounting strength of walls mounting fixtures or other building fixtures misuse or natural disasters Connecting up Cam 1 Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer 4 Connect each speaker Plug the display cable into the connector on the rear of Each speaker cable has a colour coded connector at the display unit then plug the other end of the display one end and two wires at the other end cable into SYSTEM connector on the receiver subwoofer o Caution Do not attempt to attach the display unit to the wall ZZ Colour coded wire Connect to speaker Colour coded connector Connect to receiver subwoofer 2 Assemble the AM loop antenna Connectthe wires to the speaker Each speaker in the 4 Berd the stand inthe direction indicated buie illustration can be identified by means of the colour coded indicator provided on the rear surface model label Match the colour coded wire with the colour indicator on the model label then insert the colour C If you want to fix to a wall or other surface perform coded wire into the red side and the other wire step b after first securing the stand with screws into the black side It is recommended that you determine the reception strength
5. This application or device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this application to perform disc and or file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers or embedded databases collectively Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this application or device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any paym
6. 3 Folder2 001 PIOROO00 Start Slideshow 002 PIOROOO01 Start Audio Slideshow 003 PIOROO02 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOROO03 E Print 004 PIOR0003 i i 005 PIOR0004 Copy to DVD 005 PIOROO04 PAIGE 006 PIOROO05 Detailed Information 007 PIOROO06 r Multi Mode 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 009 PIOR0008 HDD 010 PIOR0009 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 012 PIOR0011 4 Folder Size 999 MB 002 PIOR0001 gg C i F EA Shan EAE Copying to the HDD will not work if there is BE o5 ron insufficient space on the HDD if there are already the 12 Fil 006 PIOROO05 i M ooo ER maximum number of files and or folders on the HDD 008 PIOROO07 009 PIOROO08 010 PIOROO09 H ame Naming files and folders 012 PIOROO11 1 Select the file or folder you want to 5 rename You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR You can t rename files that have been locked LCD page 2 when the file or folder is highlighted Press ENTER to confirm 2 Display the command menu Copying files 3 Select File Options or Folder Options 1 Select the file s or folder s you want to copy e Copying a folder will copy all the files contained init 4 Select Rename File or Rename Folder e To copy multiple files or folders use the Multi Mode see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143 002 PIOROO01 E 2 Display the command menu ORE cuo Ape 007 PIOROO06 x
7. Set Password Next Screen If no password has yet been set enter a four digit number to become your Change Password password If you want to change the password first enter your old password then enter a new one DVD Playback Next Screen From this screen first enter your password and then set a parental lock level for playback of DVDs with parental level coding The Initial Setup menu m Setting Options Explanation D TV Age Limit Next Screen Use this screen to enter an age limit for D TV programmes Programmes that are broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set here will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be viewed You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France Denmark Finland or Sweden HDMI Output only available when an HDMI device is connected Screen Resolution 1920 x 1080p Constant 1920 x 1080p output 1920 x 1080i Constant 1920 x 1080i output 1280 x 720p Constant 1280 x 720p output 720 x 576p Constant 720 x 576p output when setting the Input Line System to 720 x 480p 525 System video is output in 720 x 480p 720 x 576i Constant 720 x 576i output when setting the Input Line System to 720 x 480i 525 System video is output in 720 x 480i If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any pict
8. 4 Select Start 2 Disc Back up Read from disc and save to HDD Start reading Cancel To see the progress of the backup press DISP LCD page 3 You can cancel the backup process by pressing O T COPY LCD page 3 for more than one second 5 When the data has been copied take out the disc and load a blank recordable DVD f you re using a DVD RW or DVD RW the disc doesn t have to be blank although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the backup process 2 Disc Back up Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive Please eject the disc and load a recordable disc You can use a DVD R ver 2 0 2 1 or 2 2 disc or DVD RW ver 1 1 or ver 1 2 disc for the backup f you backup a DVD R disc to DVD RW you cannot undo the finalization later Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc you re backing up will not fit on to a particular blank disc If this happens please try another brand of disc DVD R RW discs can only be backed up to DVD R RW discs DVD R RW discs can only be backed up to DVD R RW discs 6 Select Start to start writing the backed up data to the blank disc 2 Disc Back up Write back up data from Hard Disk Drive The disc contents will be overwritten OK to start Cancel e To see the progress of the backup press DISP e You can cancel the backup process by pressing O T COPY for more
9. 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 4 Select Yes to confirm and copy the folder s file s or No to cancel e The files will be copied to the HDD with the same folder structure as the original e Importing to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD or if there are already the maximum number of files and or folders on the HDD 999 folders 999 files per folder 1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images If you enter the PhotoViewer again it will resume reloading 2 For files you want to keep permanently we recommend backing up to DVD R RW The PhotoViewer Selecting multiple files or folders The Multi Mode allows you to select multiple folders files at once for importing or editing Select the folder containing the files you want to import 2 Display the command menu Select Folder 001 Folder Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow Folder3 New Folder Folder4 Folder Options Folders Copy to DVD Folder6 Folder7 Folder8 a 002 Folder2 Files 999 Remain pne ee Folder 999 MB 1 3 An orange check mark box M is shown by the item you selected A blue check mark box IVI appears on the folder select screen when files from that folder are selected Fl PhotoViewer HDD M Multi Mode Select Folder 001 Folderi M Folder Folder3 004 Folder4 E W Folder
10. 008 PIORO007 3 Select File Options or Folder Options 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOROO09 011 PIOROO10 Remain 012 PIOROO11 100 0 G HDD BP The PhotoViewer 5 Enter a new name for the file folder File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters long See Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 120 for how to enter a name Locking Unlocking files Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure and prevent them from being renamed Use the same process to both lock and unlock files Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a padlock icon 1 Q Select the file s you want to lock or unlock To lock unlock multiple files or folders use the Multi Mode see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143 2 Display the command menu 3 Select File Options or Folder Options 4 Folder Size 999 MB 002 PIOR0001 f Erase 003 PIOROO02 Copy 004 PIORO003 Rename File 005 PIOROO04 P Lock IPSIS 006 PIOROO05 007 PIOROO06 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOROO08 010 PIOROO09 noD 011 PIOR0010 Remain 012 PIOR0011 100 0 G Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them To remove all locks within a given folder choose Folder Option gt Unlock Folder Contents To view detailed information This feature allows you to check the settings of the camera from which you imported the photos Note 1 Choose
11. 2 With A Loop Start highlighted press at the point you want the loop to start Gg Play Mode Search Mode A Loop Start A B Repeat B Loop End Repeat Off Programme 3 With B Loop End highlighted press at the point you want the loop to end Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round When playing a DVD Video DVD R RW Video mode DVD R RW or from the HDD the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title e To resume normal playback select Off from the A B Repeat menu or press CLEAR LCD page 2 if no menu OSD such as the Play Mode menu is displayed Repeat play ALL There are various repeat play options depending on the kind of disc loaded or if you re using the HDD for playback It s also possible to use repeat play together with programme play to repeat the tracks chapters in the programme list see Programme play below Note ED Select Repeat from the Play Mode menu then choose a repeat play mode Play Mode Search Mode RepeatTitle A B Repeat Repeat Chapter Repeat O Repeat Off Programme e To resume normal playback select Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu or press CLEAR LCD page 2 if no menu OSD such as the Play Mode menu is displayed Programme play HDD DVD Video CD VideoCD SuperVCD WMA MP3 This feature lets you program the play order of titles
12. Hm AV connector POD MOU saterdag ete had nae sane eee a ns AV2 lord s NETT 0 7 Vp p 75 Q UCM m Ir a eee AV connector RGB Outpt REF AV1 Output l v l 3242460404 aeddaw ak ah oad 0 7 Vp p 75 Q Jacks KNEE AV connector AV1 Audio input sce Gulatatpane oa a a a a ees ead ee a as AV2 L R D ring audio iAp t a cedes RR CR TORRE 2 V rms Input impedance more than 22 kQ j EPI AV connector AVQIGOUPUT Wc AV1 Jig TIC SUC CUTOUT oce dx RR ee ees een as 2Vrms Output impedance less than 1 5 kQ USOS ee ee ree ha d AV connector AV1 Control ERTBEID a s da se o58 244400000 e ORCI Ro 4 Mini jack Bites serere P PITT Lr Coaxial f TUTTA Mini jack COMMON Interface Lasse eec ereer inian CA module B for 4 pin front LINK IEEE 1394 standard Sake peea beens ets eet Type A front Type B front NN eC 19 pin AV Connectors 21 pin connector assignment AV connector input output 21 pin connector This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor 13579 11131517 1921 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 PIN no AV1 RGB TV AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER V geste dOR EE E IHRE A AERE OR Audio 2 R out Audio 2 R out rrr Audio 2 R in NeW dt ge fet bk data
13. Edit gt Artist name Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the artist See T tle Name on page 120 for how to enter names Edit gt Album name Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the album See Title Name on page 120 for how to enter names Edit gt Track name Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the track See Title Name on page 120 for how to enter names Play List name Enter a name of upto 12 characters for the Play List See Title Name on page 120 for how to enter names 1 Some time may be required to erase artists or albums if they include many tracks BP The PhotoViewer Chapter 12 The PhotoViewer From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on the HDD recordable DVD or CD R RW ROM or on a USB equipped digital camera You can also import files and save them to the recorder s HDD or a DVD R RW disc Locating JPEG picture files 1 Select PhotoViewer from the Home Menu Selectthe location of the files you want to view or edit View Edit Photos on the HDD View Photos on a CD DVD View Photos on a USB Device Copy Files from a Digital Camera View Edit Photos on the HDD View or edit photos already stored on the recorder s HDD View Photos on a CD DVD View photos on a Fujicolor CD CD ROM CD R RW or DVD R RW View Photos on a USB Device View photos on a digital camera or other USB device connected to the USB port
14. Recording from a DV camcorder he source signal must be DVC SD format You can t record date and time information from DV cassette During DV recording if a part of the tape is blank or has copy protected material on it this recorder will pause recording Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal However ifthere is more than two minutes of blank tape this recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop depending on the camcorder Copying from a DV source Using the recorder s remote you can control both the camcorder and this recorder A Important e Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorder s remote For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this recorder we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to play pause 1 Makesure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack Also set the camcorder to VIR mode bid 2 Uke LCD page 1 Set the recording quality e See Setting the picture quality recording time on page 95 for detailed information 3 From the Initial Setup menu check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like See DV Input on page 155 for more on this Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them see Audio n on page 155 4 Select DV then Copy from a DV Source from
15. Select OK to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name press RETURN Using a USB keyboard to enter a name Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes entering names very quick and convenient When in USB keyboard input mode a USB icon appears in the lower left of the screen Other than the standard alpha numeric keys use the following keys when entering names Key Function Change the cursor position Select CAPS Select small Delete character at the current cursor position Delete the character at the previous cursor position Enter the name Exit the input screen P a DFS D DV e D 17 oO 1 It s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder See also Connecting a USB device on page 67 for more connection information Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters 2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode the recorder will automatically switch to remote control input mode Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode Set Thumbnail HDD DVD Video DVD VR DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in that title 1 Highlight t
16. Undo from the command menu panel You can t undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen 2 Disc Navigator DVD OTitles E No title 4 Titles Create L sb Play List VD Mode Remain 0h30m WV Frequently asked questions e Why doesn t the available recording time increase when erase titles from a VR mode DVD R When you erase titles from a DVD R or DVD R the titles are no longer displayed but the content remains on the disc DVD R R are write once media they can t be erased or rewritten e can t edit my disc You may find that as the available recording time is reduced on a VR mode DVD R disc editing is no longer possible This is because information about your edits requires a certain amount of disc space As you edit this information builds up eventually preventing you from editing further Copying and backup Chapter 10 Copying and backup Introduction Use the copying features of this recorder to Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD e Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play in another player Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch Copy feature This copies the currently playing HDD title to DVD or DVD title to the HDD See One Touch Copy below for detailed instructions For mo
17. 1904 Sangho sg 1907 9 9 oo 9 o Serbo Croatian sh 1908 Sinhalese si 1909 Slovak sk 1911 Slovenian sl 1912 Samoan sm 1913 Shona sn 1914 Somali so 1915 Albanian sq 1917 Serbian sr 1918 Siswati ss 1919 Sesotho st 1920 Sundanese su 1921 Swahili sw 1923 Tamil ta 2001 Telugu te 2005 Tajik tg 2007 Thai th 2008 Tigrinya ti 2009 Turkmen tk 2011 Tagalog tl 2012 Setswana tn 2014 Tonga to 2015 Turkish tr 2018 Tsonga ts 2019 Tatar tt 2020 Twi tw 2023 Ukrainian uk 2111 Urdu ur 2118 Uzbek uz 2126 Vietnamese vi 2209 Volap k vo 2215 Wolof wo 2315 Xhosa xh 2408 Yoruba yo 2515 Zulu zu 2621 Additional information 16 Country Area code list Country Area Country Area code Code letter Argentina 0118 ar Finland 0609 fi Malaysia 1325 my Singapore 1907 sg Australia 0121 au France 0618 fr Mexico 1324 mx Spain 0519 es Austria 0120 at Germany 0405 de Netherlands 1412 nl Sweden 1905 se Belgium 0205 be Hong Kong 0811 hk New Zealand 1426 nz Switzerland 0308 ch Brazil 0218 br India 0914 in Norway 1415 no Taiwan 2023 tw Canada 0301 ca Indonesia 0904 id Pakistan 1611 pk Thailand 2008 th Chile 0312 cl Italy 0920 it Philippines 1608 ph United Kingdom 0702 gb China 0314 cn Japan 1016 jp Portugal 1620 pt USA 2119 us Denmark 0411 dk Republic of Korea 1118 k
18. Play Press ll Stop again to cancel the resume function Pauses playback or restarts playback when paused LCD page 7 Ty 4 gt gt gt LCD page 1 Press to skip to previous next chapter title e e DVD R DVD RW only LCD page 1 Previous may not always skip to the previous title Press to start scanning Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed KD Cya SSS OS ag og CM CM BACK SKIP LCD page 7 EIFE NI VI d lt lt E gt LCD page 7 TOP MENU MENU e Em RETURN gt Except VR mode During playback enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title On some discs you can also use the num ber buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu VR mode only During playback enter a title number then press ENTER All Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again Commercial back skip Each press skips backward forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction While paused press and hold to start slow motion playback Press repeatedly to change the playback speed While paused press to advance a single frame in either direction Press to display the menu of a DVD Video disc DVD R RW discs finalized on this recorder will display the Disc Navigator Press MENU to display the disc menu Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD
19. To ensure continued safety do not remove any covers CLASS 1 or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product LASER PRODUCT Refer all servicing to qualified personnel The following caution label appears on your unit Location inside of the HDD DVD Recorder CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VRW2262 A ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DECLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT VITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED BNING UNDG UDS ETTELSE FOR STR LING VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR LNING NAR DENNA DEL AR PPNAD UNDVIK ATT UTS TTA DIG F R STRALEN VORSICHT BEI GEOFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GER TEINNEREN VORHANDEN NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN PRECAUCI N CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACI N LASER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE EVITE LA EXPOSICI N A LOS RAYOS LASER VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NAKYVALLE JA NAKYMATTOMALLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN IE TJBESET PECLASS 3B RAR Reta 57756 iR RAR HE C C4 Bi e CLASS 3B OMRU TAROT RLF hR C 4AeIEfERICD fuz D Ufa c e D3 4 2 1 8 B En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qu
20. WN 19 pin x3 8 soos Spee ee ee anak oe ee 19 pin 5 V 100 mA Other connector System CONNEC OF s s anaana anane dod Shown ee oC 26 pin leo TEE e ours su EE Yer EROR E Beh ds Optical x2 Digital RCA 2 pin Analog Coelo t BI ueuceioe a dd des prior code aoe Mini jack x2 Display unit System CONNEC OF La aacxded da dena E 3 a RS RR 26 pin FrontAUdiIO WNDU 4 o dr dd dct db edd a oen a os Mini jack MGCACC INPUT a sch daas PE PER ER EIE SR Mini jack POO IUE acis ich EP ER an 20 pin 12 V 420 mA e Miscellaneous Power requirements AC 220 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Power CONSUMOUON s vadu ees RR ETATE KE das es 69 W Power consumption in standby Mian ed ead aah ee ee bee es 0 39 W HDMI Control ON 0 29 W HDMI Control OFF Dimensions 245 mm W x 409 mm H x 600 mm D Welg Mi os dua qesea vd adea ce vl kd don oad E S 17 8 kg SSP LX70ST Satellite Speaker Front center speakers x2 Surround speakers x2 e Front center speakers PMCIOSURE is dvscsbeusachaeees Closed box bookshelf type magnetically shielded VSM we kth bd dur dote v dob 5 2 cm 1 way system SPEAKS cis qa dac xe de dace es 5 2 cm cone type x3 Nominal impedance FrOMLCHAMNNG neriesi FRE SIRE PER EYad ex E ERE RR s 8 Q Eg Mr 8Q Frequency range ace do C RERO 200 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power FRORRCRANNE as erm al sext ap p se Pic e dc Da iet ood 50W Center channel 0 cece cece eet ens 50 W
21. see Recording Mode on page 131 Bilingual Set how bilingual audio should be copied when copying from HDD to DVD R RW Video mode and DVD R RW see Bilingual on page 132 Cancel Exit the menu Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing 9 Display the command menu panel kA Note 1 If atimer recording is scheduled to start during copying the disc will not be finalized En Copy HDD gt DVD Video mod Title Edit H 1 20 00 Wed29 03 Pr2 SP 2 20 00 Wed22 03 Pr2 SP oo Back Eg Wed29 03 Pr2 SP 1h00m 2 0G Copy List Total Current DVD Remain 4 38 Cd 4 38 L 1 There are several options available from the next screen Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality see Recording Mode on page 131 Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the disc name Input a name of up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc or DVD R RW The input method is similar to that of naming titles see 7 tle Name on page 120 Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R after copying Select a title menu style from the following screen Select Start Copy to start copying Bez Copy HDD gt DVD Start Copy HDD DVD RW Video Mode Copy Time Oh 16m Back Recording Mode Input Disc Name Recording Mode Finali
22. then select Series Search from the command menu panel e The search results are displayed Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording 1 e Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster his function may not be applicable to all programmes 05 Using the digital electronic programme guide Searching for recommendations UK only You can search for recommended programmes generated from the content of the programmes you have scheduled to record 1 Press TIMER REC LCD page 7 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search 4 e eren 9 3 Press then select Recommendation Search from the command menu panel The search results are displayed Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording Other useful EPG functions EPG Jump 1 Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen Programme List Detailed information or Search Result is displayed 2 In the Date field select a date within one week to jump to Date 4 Mon 13 Sep SENE a qEE D QE D 3 In the Time field select a time of the day 0 00 to 23 00 to jump to 4 Select Jump The Programme List for the specified day and time is displayed Note EPG Search 1 Press YELLOW when the EPG screen Programme List Detailed informat
23. Dimensions 122 5 mm W x 89 5 mm H x 104 mm D WENE Py 0 5 kg e Surround speakers EHCIOSUIB Ld esatto dr dos Closed box bookshelf type magnetically shielded USB adt db iran oh dol REA Ro 5 2 cm 1 way system coc cr P 5 2 cm cone type x2 Nominal ImpsdalteB sca auction oed Hr RR 8 Q Frequency range oo eee cee ees 200 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum DULL BOWE iuc am oom wos d e n 50 W Dimensions 122 5 mm W x 89 5 mm H x 104 mm D WVGIOIIL 2 0 terest Saeed REOR RUE EU ee E S RUE oe 0 44 kg Accessories e Accessory box AS LX70 Remote control 3s she e anao er Bc qr ao cor p OER eee ard e 1 AA LR6 alkaline DEUCES wv ccs icu rrt ER or e a en 4 OWOPNDOFCS cus wipe dedre d PERO a eee ERES VER hcc s 2 Bac WM am T nad E ae ae a a ae Sere as 1 AM loop antenna 24 caeca ducam ah Rd xpo PES Ed RS 1 FM wire antenna 54 5406s eh ea EC ce RON Red CY XC PS Yd RES 1 Microphone for Auto MCACC setup 0000 cee eee 1 wE geo 2 hn jac cheaceu gh Dien dea daiken inniit 2 Control cable qd am sans ania d quara dp e acr dc bx cena ws 1 Display cable vss p ades Pac ER E EY X eS Pb 1 Qieal digital eblGeu ese ea ee eee ee don 1 POG CADIE 2c pramada gia a e Hee a hanced a aT 1 GLINKA OSIDIBL iyi 9 HE 3 Jhon do oce s 1 RF antenna CADIS da duci Ie wea CX dc REY ce d ra 2 Warranty Caf ieee t eea aih a bo 2 mitaa Sears a wae ens 1 These operating instructions e Receiver subwoofer SX LX70SW box CHES CUO Messed nasa e eye ET de
24. LCD page 1 Press during recording to start playback from the beginning of the current recording e NAVIGATOR Press during recording to select another title to play You can use all the usual playback controls such as pause slow motion play scan and skip e To stop playback press W Stop recording will continue To stop recording press STOP REC playback will continue During recording or in timer recording standby you can t play an HDD title DVD or Video CD Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting doesn t match the TV line system of the disc HDD title see also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 161 Also during simultaneous recording and playback if the TV line system of the playback track title changes then playback will automatically stop Note Recording from an external component DVD VR DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM HDD You can record from an external component such as a camcorder or VCR connected to an external input of the recorder 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the HDD DVD recorder See Chapter 2 Recorder connections for connection options 2 LCD page 2 Press repeatedly to select an external input of the recorder to record from The current input is shown on screen and in the front panel display AV2 L1 Input 1 Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are a
25. Menu Proceed to step 4 when playing back an Audio CD amp 2 pisc Navigator DVD CD Track List 10 Tracks ma 2 TRACK2 3 gt TRACK3 l 4 TRACK4 TRACKS TRACK6 TRACKT TRACK8 3 TRACK1 650MB 0 04 30 1 14 00 classical gt TRACK3 0 05 30 Track Repeat Stereo 3 10 00 00 4 Vx Select what you want to play Playback starts after you press ENTER e Use the amp LCD page 3 buttons to display the previous next page of folders tracks titles You can also select Play from the command menu options For discs that contain CD audio tracks and WMA MP3 tracks or DivX titles you can switch the playback area between CD WMA MP3 and DivX Playback stops if you switch the playback area during playback See Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator on page 108 In case of an Audio CD press DISP LCD page 3 to display the detailed information album name and artist name on the track currently selected with a cursor About the automatic display of titles This unit has built in information on titles extracted from the Gracenote database This unit automatically searches for titles when you press Play LCD page f after loading an Audio CD or when you display the Disc Navigator The following screen is displayed 9 HDD DVD RECORDER Accessing to Gracenote Database POWERED BY gt gracenote Upon completion of search album name artist name track name
26. RW loaded with some free space for recording HDD to DVD and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc Also make sure that for a DVD R RW Video mode or a DVD R the disc isn t finalized e Make sure there is a recordable DVD R RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc f you delete a title from a DVD R RW disc the number of remaining recordable titles may not decrease Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD R Check that there isn t a disc menu on the disc you re trying to use e f the title currently playing contains material that is copy once protected One Touch Copy will not work e f the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP mode the One Touch Copy feature can t be used One Touch Copy can t be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD R RW though you can use a DVD R DL e One Touch Copy can t be used for MN1 to MN6 SEP SLP or EP titles when copying to DVD R RW e One Touch Copy doesn t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD Can t use One Touch Copy Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles DVD to HDD on the HDD One Touch Copy doesn t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD The device connected to Check that the device is compatible with this recorder page 67 the USB port is not Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length recogn
27. USB e Compatible formats MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 MP3 Windows Media Audio WMA e Sampling rates 32 kHz 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz Bit rates Any 128 kbps or higher recommended Variable bit rate VBR MP3 playback Yes VBR WMA playback No WMA encoder compatibility Windows Media Codec 8 files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported specifically Pro Lossless Voice and VBR DRM Digital Rights Management file playback No File extensions mp3 wma these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files do not use for other file types File structure The recorder can load up to 99 folders 999 files at one time if there are more files folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded WMA Windows Media Audio content This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing Inc DRM digital rights management copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback etc of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC or other recording equipment used to record
28. Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing For more information about these options see Editing accuracy on page 118 4 Select the command you want Divide Divide a chapter into two or more parts Use the playback controls gt H lt lt gt gt etc LCD page 5 Select Exit to get back to the main Disc 7 to find the point at which you want to divide the Navigator screen chapter then press ENTER Set Genre d Chapter Edit DVD VR model lay List Gon 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP Hecate meen Use this command to assign a genre to a title Chapters 5 1 Highlight the title you want to assign a Exit genre to Erase Move SSS SES SSS Sas Combine You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as 2 Select Edit gt Set Genre from the you wish up to 999 chapters per DVD R RW RAM command menu panel disc or 99 chapters per HDD title e Erase Move Erase or move chapters Select the Eq Disc Navigator HDD E 10Titles chapter you want to erase move and press ENTER 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr4 Select whether you want to erase or move the E 23 00 Fri 3 72 Pr4 E 4 Titles Set Thumbnail chapter g 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr Erase Section l Divide Move command only Select the destination for the p 000 PIE Pr chapter Eat chapter and press ENTER Cancel Gd Chapter Edit DVD VR Y Play List 2 7 19 00 MON
29. Video disc menus press ENTER to select items Press to return to the previous level of a DVD Video disc menu Playing from the HDD Thetable below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk HDD LCD page 7 LCD page 1 LCD page 1 Note Press to start playback If RESUME is displayed on screen play back starts from the place last stopped Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached Press to stop playback You can resume playback from the same point by pressing Play Press IB Stop again to cancel the resume function Pauses playback or restarts playback when paused me Press to start scanning Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed LCD page 1 m a Press to skip to previous next chapter title LCD page 7 Ent During playback enter a title number then 8 t3 press ENTER to skip directly to that title gg Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and gg start again LCD page 2 Commercial back skip NGS EL Each press skips backward forward LCD page 1 progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction While paused press and hold to start DEN Edad slow motion playback Press repeatedly to LCD page 1 change the playback speed While paused press to advance a single frame in either direction Playing CDs and WMA MP3 discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Audio
30. and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don t have to manually tune in every time you want to listen 1 Switch to the tuner then press repeatedly to select the FM or AM band The display shows the band and frequency 2 Tune to a frequency There are three tuning modes manual auto and high speed e Manual tuning Press TUNE repeatedly to change the displayed frequency e Auto tuning Press and hold TUNE until the frequency display starts to move then release The tuner will stop on the next station it finds Repeat to keep searching e High speed tuning Press and hold TUNE until the frequency display starts to move rapidly Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want If necessary fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method Improving poor FM reception If you re listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono 1 Press after tuning to an FM radio station em 2 Select Tuner Setup then press ENTER e em 3 Choose FM Auto Mono then press ENTER 4 Select FM Mono then press ENTER The mono indicator O lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode Select FM Auto above to switch back to auto stereo mode the stereo indicator CD lights when receiving a stereo broadcast Improving poor AM sound The simplest way to improve the sound qu
31. and genre are automatically displayed 107 ND eek SSS OS e When multiple titles have been found use f 4 to select a title and press ENTER If you select No Information and press ENTER Unknown is displayed e Unknown is displayed when there are no titles found Depending on the title a different title name may be displayed e Information on new CDs on sale may not be registered in the Gracenote database installed in this unit Use the Update Disc with the latest data downloaded from the Pioneer website to update the built in Gracenote database see Gracenote Database on page 160 GUI displays may show the Gracenote database as Database Reloading files from a WMA MP3 disc When this unit reloads a WMA MP3 disc with over 1000 files or over 100 folders the files and folders are displayed in the Disc Navigator 1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list Read next 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files 99 folders from the disc It takes several minutes for files to be reloaded Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator You can display titles by data format or by folder track 1 Display the view options panel The view options panel 10 Tracks 5 TRACK1 Data Format WMA MP3 TRACK2 TRACK3 Display Mode a Track TRACK4 WMA 999MB gt TRACK3 0 05 30 Track Repeat Stereo 3 10 00 00 Note 2 Choose Data Forma
32. channels that your TV is tuned to Downloading I 32 99 Cancel 9 x Select Auto for automatic time setting or Manual to set the clock manually If the clock was already set from a D TV channel in step 6 this step is skipped Clock Setting OAuto Manual Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the programme This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically Set Clock Set CH to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal then move the cursor down to Start and press ENTER Auto Clock Setting Date oed e Time ce P og Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start The recorder takes a short while to set the time After you see that it s set select Next to proceed Auto Clock Setting Date MON 01 01 2007 Time JE Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Next If the time could not be set automatically press RETURN to go backto the previous screen and select Manual Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals you can set the clock manually Use the buttons to set your time zone You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT Manual Clock Setting 1 2 England Time Zon me cone 1 London Summer Time Off Press then use the buttons to select On or Off for summer time then press ENTER Select On if you are currently using summer time Manua
33. chapters folders tracks on a disc or the HDD 1 Select Programme from the Play Mode menu then Input Edit Programme The Input Edit Programme screen varies according to the disc type Below is the DVD input screen gg Programme Step A Title 01 03 A Chapter 001 015 A 01 001 Title 01 j Chapter 001 02 Title 02 Chapter 002 03 Title 03 Chapter 003 04 Chapter 004 05 Chapter 005 06 Chapter 006 07 Chapter 007 08 Chapter 008 w v v 4 gt 2 Select a title chapter folder or track for the current step in the programme list After pressing ENTER to add the title chapter folder track the step number automatically moves down one e To insert a step into the programme list highlight the step number where you want to insert another step then select a chapter title folder track as usual After pressing ENTER all the subsequent steps move down one 1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A B repeat play A B repeat is cancelled 2 f you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD Video disc repeat play is cancelled 3 When playing a programme list of DVD Video chapters chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played depending on the disc Cayak o odelete a step from the programme list highlight the step you want to delete then press CLEAR LCD page 2 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list A progra
34. do not unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from the breaker switch Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off If you need to move the recorder please follow the steps below 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the front panel display wait at least two minutes 2 Unplug from the wall socket 3 Move the recorder If there s a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost The HDD is very delicate If used over time in an improper manner or in an unsuitable environment it is possible that the HDD will fail Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise mosaic in the picture However sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure If the HDD fails no playback of recorded material will be possible In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit Optimizing HDD performance As you record and edit material on the HDD the data on the disk becomes fragmented eventually affecting the recorder s performance Before this happens the recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD which you can do from the Disc Setup menu see Optimize HDD on page 148 Recorder connections Chapter 2 Recorder connections Connecting a TV antenna This recorder has separate built in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial
35. downloaded by the recorder overnight This only happens if the recorder is in standby if the recorder is left on it will not download When not using the recorder please switch it into standby Data downloads can take several hours The front panel display shows EPG when downloading If you switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed the download will be cancelled The GUIDE Plus system is not supported in my area but when switch the recorder into standby after a while the front panel display shows EPG Can stop this from happening If the GUIDE Plus system is not supported in your area please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE Plus setup see Setting up the GUIDE Plus amp system on page 71 When the GUIDE Plus service starts in your area please set the postal code again The automatic Host Channel search failed or the GUIDE Plus system identified the wrong Host Channel for my region You can identify your Host Channel manually See Manual Host Channel setup on page 83 for how to do this Using the digital electronic programme guide CH Chapter 5 Using the digital electronic programme guide This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select setting made in the Setup Navigator or the Initial Setup menu is set to Digital EPG The Digital EPG system The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV programmes and detailed information about individual programmes It also
36. e The maximum number of titles chapters per title that can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99 respectively No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached e The maximum continuous recording time for one title is 12 hours It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD Before recording you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting page 161 matches the TV line system of the source you re recording HDD Video mode compatibility When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in one of two formats Set the format from the HDD Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu see page 158 When set to Video Mode On high speed copying from HDD to DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW is possible When recording a bilingual broadcast set which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup menu see Bilingual Recording on page 155 When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off high speed copying from HDD to DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW isn t possible However both channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback Recorded audio In all except the LPCM mode sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format only Dolby Digital 2 0 can be recorded Dolby Digital 5 1 recording is not possible When set to LPCM sound is recorded in high quality uncompressed Linear PCM format If the broadcast aud
37. page 28 3 Tune to a station page 35 The LCD screen changes to that for the radio and you can then operate the desired component a VOL A Adjust the volume Chapter 5 Getting started A Important e Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen as shown below RECEIVER F S SURR Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration MCACC system measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area taking into account ambient noise and testing for channel delay and channel level After you have set up the microphone provided the system uses the information from a series of test tones to measure standing wave and reverb optimizing the speaker settings and equalization MCACC Effect for your 1 particular room A Important The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud however do not turn the volume down during setup as this may result in a sub optimal setup e Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the MCACC setup kA Note K Getting started 1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on back of the display unit 2 Place the microphone at your normal listening position Place it about ear height and make sure it is level by using a table or chair Make sure the
38. the input automatically changes to iPod 4 MCACC SETUP MIC jack Use to connect the supplied microphone for the Auto MCACC setup see page 30 Front panel DV IN USB e amp 6 ANTENNA DIGITAL IN OUT Connect your DIV antenna to the ANTENNA DIGITAL IN jack The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA DIGITAL OUT jack for connection to your TV 7 HDMI OUT Connect to the HDMI IN 1 jack of the receiver subwoofer 8 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to Dolby Digital DTS MPEG decoder or other equipment with a digital input 9 ACIN Power inlet Front panel On the front panel there is a flip down cover that hides more connections 10 DV IN A DV input i LINK connector suitable for connecting a DV camcorder 11 USB port Type B USB port for connecting a PictBridge compatible printer or PC 12 USB port Type A USB port for connecting a digital camera keyboard or other USB device 02 Connecting up Basic connections Receiver subwoofer Display unit AM loop antenna Front center FM antenna speaker L Surround speaker L A Important When connecting this system or changing connections be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket After completing all connections connect the power cords to the wall socket
39. transmitted and received by DVI compliant displays HDMI has the capability to support standard enhanced or high definition video plus standard to multi channel surround sound audio HDMI features include uncompressed digital video a bandwidth of up to five gigabits per second Dual Link one connector instead of several cables and connectors and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DIVs 1 In order to use this setup you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu e Set the AV2 L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu see AV2 L1 In on page 155 From the Manual CH Setting screen set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On see Manual CH Setting on page 154 02 Recorder connections HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC HDMI Control By connecting the receiver subwoofer to an HDMI Control compatible Pioneer plasma television with an HDMI cable you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected plasma television as well as have the connected plasma television automatically change inputs in response to this unit starting playback Refer to the operating instructions for your plasma television and HDMI Control on page 44 for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable Auto select function You ca
40. 1 4 cursor buttons and ENTER Use to navigate all on screen displays Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option 5 HOME MENU Display the HOME MENU screen 6 RETURN Restores the previous menu screen 7 Colour RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE buttons Teletext mode Selects a page PDP 1 2 LCD touch screen 8 Number buttons TV External input mode Selects a channel Teletext mode Selects a page 9 TV DTV For Pioneer plasma televisions only Switches between the analog TV and DTV input modes 10 P TV External input mode Selects a channel 11 INPUT Selects an input source of the TV 12 MUTE Mutes the sound 13 TV VOL Sets the volume Controls and displays Cm The following only apply to Pioneer plasma televisions 14 CJ Jumps to Teletext subtitle page 15 E Displays hidden characters 16 Selects the Teletext mode all IV image all TEXT image TV TEXT image 17 193 Displays the channel information 1s B TV External input mode Freezes a frame from a moving image Press again to cancel the function 19 GP Selects the screen size 20 Displays an Index page for the CEEFAX FLOF format Displays a TOP Over View page for the TOP format 21 E Teletext mode Stops updating Teletext pages Press again to release the hold mode 22 EF Teletext mode Switches Teletext images full upper halt lower half 23 INFO 24 EXIT Press to exit
41. 13 10 Logos HDD AL HARD DISK DRIVE AP 2 FT i eye Re recordable Erasable e n 73 e 6 S e 14 Editing of recorded programmes e e e 9 e e e 4 4 4 4 Recording of Copy once protected e e o e material e UE TEE Playback in other players recorders n a SE e i2 6 e o e 6 6 e 15 8 9 Chase play e 16 9 and 4 3 programme recording e e 9 Bilingual broadcast recording of e e e e both audio channels 10 11 31 11 11 Notes to table Using DVD R DL DVD R DL discs 1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording page 147 DVD R DL Dual Layer and DVD R DL Double Layer 2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording page 147 3 Erasable but free space does not increase 4 Cannot erase sections edit chapters or use playlist editing discs contain two recordable layers on a single side giving about 1 8 times the recording capacity of a 5 Must be compatible with DVD R VR playback conventional single layer disc This recorder can record 6 Finalize using this recorder may not playback in some units to both DVD R DL and DVD R DL discs page 107 7 Must be compatible with DVD RW VR playback e IT you intend to play DVD R DL Video mode or 8 Must be compatible with DVD RW playback DVD R DL discs recorded on this recorder on other 9 Must be compatible with DVD RAM playback DVD recorders players you must finalize them Note 10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off that some DVD recorders players ma
42. 29 11 Pr 2 sP 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP Lais 1h00m 1 06 19 00 Mon 29 11 Rec time 1 Move Chapter i Cancel FE 002 003 004 5 005 L d E2 ii 3 Select a genre for the title Exit Divide a Erase Move Disc Navigator HDD 10Titles Combine g 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr 4 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr E E Movies Drama Entertainmt News Sport e Combine Combine two adjacent chapters into one Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER 22 00 THU 2 12 F adem 22 00 Thu 2712 Comedy Gd Chapter Edit DVD VR mod amp Play List ia 19 00 MON 29 11 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP Rec time 1h00m 1h00m 1 0G 1 2 Ls AE 5 Pu mE Exit Divide Erase Move Combine kA Note 1 When editing VR mode Original content it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long 2 VR mode Play List only 3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters even though they are adjacent If a chapter has been divided into three then the middle chapter erased it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one Lock Move HDD DVD Video DVD VR DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM DVD VR DVD RAM P ay List only Original only Use this function to re arrange the playing order of Play You can lock a title so that it can t be edited or erased Li
43. 3 Controls and displays Display unit OSTANDBY ON INPUT SELECTOR VOL Top buttons 1 STANDBY ON Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on into standby 2 INPUT SELECTOR page 40 Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio inputs HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 Digital 1 Digital 2 Analog iPod or Front Audio In 3 VOL buttons Use to adjust the volume 4 POWER ON indicator Blue 5 Front panel display See below for details 6 IRremote sensor page 26 7 HDMI indicator Red Lights when this receiver subwoofer is connected to HDMI HDCP compatible component Also lights during initialization after you plug this unit into an AC outlet Controls and displays Cm Display ogogo nnum nuupu numm ooooo nunnu O DODIGITAL PCOEH Googe aooga Headed Paama popoa H DTS 96 24 Go000 oomoo onono ooooo ponon onnon H Dgnuu ooooo OOOO ooooo ooooo ooooo O tud Nu NS amane RO WU DSD PCM nmn oonoo ooooo coocoo oooDo pocoo O Lights when Direct Sound is selected i e Effective Sound is off page 31 2 Listening mode indicators STEREO Lights when the Stereo mode is selected or when a stereo source is being played back in the Auto listening mode page 33 F S SURR Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround Advance listening modes is selected page 33 ADV SURR Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected page 32 3 OO PROLOGIC II Lights during Dolby Pr
44. 34 digital channel D034 press 3 4 ENTER For D TV channels only you can also use the Channel List see below tip When changing terrestrial digital broadcast channels channels with a low signal strength may result in a black screen being displayed Forother channels it may take a short while for the channel picture to appear and or for the channel number to appear e n both of the above cases some improvement may be possible by adjusting the antenna Note Using the D TV Channel List When in D TV mode you can call upthe on screen Channel List anytime by pressing ENTER Use the buttons to select a channel then press ENTER to switch to that channel 2 Displaying a channel banner A channel banner shows programme titles start and end times of the current programme and other channel information The information is updated every minute Press to display the channel banner for the current channel amp J Wed 30 Apr 12 46 11 30 12 00 12 00 12 30 e Use the buttons to display the channel banner for other channels To switch to the displayed banner s channel press ENTER The channel banner displays the Subtitles qj and Teletext MHEG amp icon if they apply to the selected channel To see more detailed channel information press INFO again 11 30 12 00 Use the f 4 amp buttons to display information about previous and following programmes Us
45. CDs and WMA MP3 files Press to start playback LCD page 7 n Press to stop playback LCD page 1 Pauses playback or restarts playback n when paused LCD page 1 E Press to start scanning Press again to dad increase the scanning speed There are LCD page 1 two scan speeds the current scan speed is shown on screen m e Press to skip to previous next track LCD page 7 1 If you want to play a DTS Audio CD make sure the recorder is connected to a DIS compatible amp receiver with a digital connection Noise will be output through the analog outputs Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the Gp button LCD page 3 see Switching audio channels on page 111 Haad o Playing Video CD Super VCDs Playing DivX video files The table below shows the basic playback controls for The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD Super VCDs DivX video files Some discs feature Playback Control PBC for short menus These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on screen from where you can select what to watch Press to start playback gt If RESUME is displayed on screen play LCD page 7 back starts from the place last stopped Playback of titles DivX files proceeds in Iph ical m Press to start playback alphabetical order Video CD only If RESUME is displayed on Press to stop playback LCD page 1 screen playback starts from the place last m
46. Code SW109AD GUIDE Plus External Receiver 1 None au External Receiver 2 None External Receiver 3 None One Button Recording aug You can change the Language Country Postal Code and the External Receiver settings 3 Press ENTER to confirm Manual Host Channel setup The GUIDE Plus system will automatically identify your Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby for the first time See the table on page 72 for a list of all the European Host Channels If you know your Host Channel details source and programme number or if the automatic identification did not provide the expected result you can identify your Host Channel manually Select Host Channel Setup in the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV Select the correct source e g internal tuner or external receiver and enter the respective programme number e g if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your Host Channel enter 9 as the programme number When you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE Plus system will complete the Host Channel setup Note You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back to the default setting of automatic Please be aware that resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data GUIDE Plus FAQ and troubleshooting This FAQ covers only a few questions For a complete list please consult the GUIDE Plus website at www europe guideplus com V FAQ e Whe
47. Copy Files from a Digital Camera Copy all DCF files directly from a connected digital camera to a recordable DVD R RW Select the folder containing the files you want to view copy or edit The first image from the selected folder is displayed as thumbnail at the bottom of the screen From the Folder kA Note Information column you can change thumbnails via the lt gt buttons LCD page 7 Currently selected folder in folder list HR PhotoViewer HDD Select Folder 001 Folderi T 002 Folder2 WIE 903 Folder3 4 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder 007 Folder 008 Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB Folder information 4 Select the file you want to view copy or edit 100 0 G Pages in folder list Currently selected thumbnail HIB PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 m 001 PIOROO00 002 PIOROO01 Folder Size 999 MB t Ee a 003 PIOR0002 E 004 PIOROO03 g Ei 005 PIOROO04 E g AG 006 PIOROO05 E 007 PIOROO06 008 PIOROO07 009 PIOROO08 010 PIOROO09 011 PIOROO10 012 PIOROO11 1 84 Pages in file list The larger the file size the longer it takes the recorder to load the file e You can change folders via the lt gt buttons f you encounter a disc that will not play check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder see JPEG file compatibility and PC created disc c
48. DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder A Important f you connect a second recorder using a DV cable you cannot control the second unit from this one You can t control this recorder remotely from a component connected to the DV IN jack Playing from a DV camcorder 1 Makesure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack 2 From the Initial Setup menu check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like See DV Input on page 155 for more on this Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them see Audio In on page 155 3 Select DV then DV Video Playback from the Home Menu 4 Start playback on the camcorder Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV To record the incoming video press HDD DVD LCD page 1 to select the HDD or a DVD for recording then press REC LCD page 7 Press STOP REC LCD page 1 to finish recording If there is no signal from the device connected to the DV jack or the signal is copy protected recording will pause It will automatically restart once there is a recordable signal he recorder will only start recording from the DV IN jack if there is a valid signal Recording will pause if the signal is interrupted during recording f your source is copy protected using Copy Guard you will not be able to record it See Restrictions on video recording on page 92 for more details
49. Dolby Pro Logic 4 1 channel surround sound for use with any two channel source e Neo 6 Cinema 6 1 channel sound especially suited to movie sources e Neo 6 Music 6 1 channel sound especially suited to music sources see Center image setting on page 32 e Stereo See Listening in stereo on page 33 With multichannel sources you can select according to format Auto Auto listening mode see page 31 StandardDecode Listening in Dolby Digital or DTS surround decoding Plays back multichannel sources like Dolby Digital DIS and multichannel PCM with the most standard decoder e Stereo See Listening in stereo on page 33 Dolby Pro Logic Il Music settings When listening in Dolby Pro Logic Il Music mode see above there are three settings you can adjust Center Width Dimension and Panorama 1 Souno Press when Dolby Pro Logic Il Music mode is active eres gt 2 Select Center Width Dimension or Panorama then press ENTER e Center Width Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers making it sound wider higher settings or narrower lower settings Dimension Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back making the sound more distant minus settings or more forward positive settings kA Note e Panorama Extends the front stereo image to include the
50. LX70 e Remote control page 18 AA LR6 alkaline batteries x4 page 26 Power cords x2 page 13 Display unit page 16 AM loop antenna page 11 FM wire antenna page 11 Microphone for Auto MCACC setup page 30 HDMI cables x2 page 13 42 44 Control cable page 13 Display cable page 11 Optical digital cable page 13 iPod cable page 41 G LINK cable page 63 RF antenna cables x2 page 13 These operating instructions Warranty card Installation ana maintenance xa m aaa 48 Hints on installation aasa saasaa aed dre 48 SUI CUNG SOUNC TORmdls sosickrx Y E RESI 49 ONO end 4 scat CR aco lal te APe aceerararareee saa ae OR 49 bI PPP ee we AAA A Se ee 49 Troubleshooting uus ae 64056648 2eeRRSRESESS 50 CIN iia Gi ct aa eo oe nea net ttt wae acaeaea ane a ee 50 Tele eedassss deat ewe wee 51 a Me TP 51 Displayed IessadeS 12222568856 RN crpka aanas 52 Specifications use pex wap E EU NEREGEERFEEEE4dE 53 Section Two Operating instructions for HDD DVD Recorder SDVR LX70D 54 Receiver subwoofer SX LX70SW box Cleaning cloth Speakers SSP LX70ST box e Speakers front center x2 surround x2 page 6 11 e Speaker cables x6 page 11 e Speaker bases x4 page 6 Non skid pads x16 page 6 7 e Screws x4 page 7 Speaker Setup Guide Chapter 1 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up When assembling the speakers lay t
51. Live TV below or using this recorder s internal tuner see Using the recorder s internal tuner for Pause Live TV on page 97 TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV To use this feature with an external TV tuner the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable and the AV Link setting page 160 should be set to 7 s Recorder Only See also Pause Live TV on page 160 for more on this In order to use Pause Live TV make the following connections and settings Pause Live IV will not work as expected when watching TV via an external component such as a VCR or digital tuner It only works with the channel selected on the TV A Important e Pause Live TV only works with the built in A TV analog tuner It does not work with the D TV tuner or the external input Make sure the Auto Channel Setting is set to Download from TV see Auto Channel Setting on page 154 1 Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART cable 2 Press HOME MENU 2 Not all TVs support this feature Check the instructions that came with your TV if you are unsure his feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you re unsure about your TV s compatibility with this feature 3 Select Initial Setup gt Options2 gt Pause Live TV gt TV s Tuner 4 Select Initial Setup gt Analog Tuner gt Auto Channel Setting gt
52. MP3 sources To use this function you must have an HDMI Control compatible Pioneer HDD DVD recorder connected via HDMI and have the HDMI Control function set to On Using the Sound Retriever When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA compression process sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed two channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression amp rip his feature is effective when used together with the Jukebox function of the HDD DVD recorder e Press while listening to a stereo source Press repeatedly to switch between Retriever On Switches the Sound Retriever on Retriever Off Switches the Sound Retriever off DD DVD recorder 3 This setting cannot be used with multichannel sources Also in case of SACD DTS HD DTS Express Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus and PCM 192 kHz 176 4 kHz even stereo sources cannot be used KO Listening to your system Listening with MCACC Effect Listen to sound using the corrected acoustic field settings obtained by MCACC 1 Souno Press to open the sound menu gt Select MCACC Effect then press ENTER 3 Switch MCACC On or MCACC Off then press ENTER to confirm When MCACC Effect is off
53. Press the Green button for Manual recording Press for My TV Press for Info Grid Search My TV Schedule Recording Schedule Qual Freq Dest 25 May Friends LP Tue HDDr Welcome to GUIDE Plus Sanne One Button Recording 2 Press the RED Action button VIDEO Plus 3 Use the number buttons LCD Page 2 to enter a PlusCode programming number aug qa I BBC2 25 May 10 10 amp Please enter the PlusCode programming number and press ENTER to confirm Recording Schedule Qual Freq Dest 25 May Friends LP Tue HDDr eet SP Once HDD Welcome to GUIDE Plus Sanit One Button Recording f you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE Plus system you may also have to input a channel number Follow the on screen display to do this 4 Press ENTER to confirm Setting a manual recording 1 Select Schedule from the Menu bar BBC2 25 May 10 10 MUT ETE v air Schedule displays programmes for Record Press e to use Press the Red button for VIDEO Plus recording Press the Green button for Manual recording Press for My TV Press for Info Grid Search My TV Schedule Recording Schedule Qual Freq Dest 25 May Friends LP Tue HDDr 29 May Men in Black SP Once HDD Welcome to GUIDE Plus Caunet One Button Recording 2 Press the GREEN Action button Manual 3 Use the number LCD Page 2 and 41 buttons to enter the recording date then pr
54. RCRORORCROR ROCA RC e cx CC 39 Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone 39 09 Other connections Connecting auxiliary components 40 Connecting for digital audio 40 Connecting an analog audio component 40 COMnMeCung ab P DEL s ccn dco dp eu dicii x 41 Listening to an external audio source 41 Connecting external antennas leere 42 ADOUT COntrol our CornfieclboliS esacea oe ee eo ee ees 42 Connecting using HOM suapte ip awe ol e as 42 HOM Mode setting eundo d do em de dettes 43 About ADM i ao bass irriizPPPLes22200250mau 43 10 HDMI Control Making the HDMI Control connections 44 oening Wie MUM OPTIONS uad 44 0a eam oa a Re 45 Setting the HDMI Control mode gg tee ten 45 Setting the Auto Delay llle 46 Audio input settings from Plasma televisions ET BENDUMI ca tmi coe S dea e qm C RC Rer 46 Before using synchronization 46 Synchr nized SIND INCE s deua ees 46 Synchronized amp mode operations 46 Canceling synchronized amp mode 46 11 Additional information Dimmingthe display sitaaieeceded eer ww wm ms 47 Setting the sleep timer eee eee eee ee 47 Setting up the remote to control your IV 47 IV Preset Code IIS oo ee d E ERU Eu pene 48 Resetting e Syste a tien d dcr aae e s 48 What s in the box Please confirm that the following items are all supplied Accessory box AS
55. RW Video mode or DVD R RW Use a DVD R RW VR mode or DVD RAM disc for this type of material e When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off titles recorded in LP MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high speed copied to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW Please use a DVD R RW VR mode or DVD RAM Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high speed copied to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW Please use a DVD R RW VR mode or DVD RAM XP titles cannot be copied to DVD via One Touch Copy itles over eight hours cannot be copied to single layer DVD R RW discs using One Touch Copy Use DVD R DL discs for titles over eight hours itles recorded in MN1 to MN6 SEP SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD R RW using One Touch Copy Note Copying to the HDD The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours e itle name and chapter markers are also copied except when copying from a finalized Video mode DVD R RW e Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original e f some part of the title being copied is copy protected copying will start but the copy protected portions will not be copied Using Copy Lists See also Copyright on page 127 At its simplest a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy When copying HDD titles to DVD you can however edit the tit
56. Set screen see Setting timer programmes on page 86 gt 5 After entering all the timer recording information highlight Store Programme and press ENTER The timer recording list screen is displayed again The timer programme you just input appears in the list The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages e OK Can be recorded Time Over Not enough space on the HDD the recording won t finish Over 12h Recording time of over 12 hours set when recording to the HDD the recording will be split into two titles Overlap Two timer programmes partially or completely overlap The one starting earlier will take priority Until eg Until 13 8 For a regular recording the last programme that could be recorded is shown Data Over Can t record because the disc management area of the disc is full Cancel Once A regular timer programme is set to skip Can t Rec Not possible to record Title Over Can t record because there is already the maximum number of titles on the disc HDD 999 DVD 99 Recording The programme is currently recording Standby The recorder is in timer recording standby Valid Until eg Valid Until 13 8 UK only When you have set to make a series recording of a programme that has no new scheduled broadcasts the date displayed indicates the last day until which the scheduled programme settings remain valid If the
57. Setting One Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays Off Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays Press HELP on the remote to manually display the Help screen EPG Type Select GUIDE Plus Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus EPG Digital EPG Use the EPG based on information provided by D TV broadcasts Setup Navigator Start Select to start the Setup Navigator See also Switching on and setting up on page 68 The Initial Setup menu m Setting Options Explanation Digital Tuner Replace Channels Next Screen Scans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the results Before the scan starts you will need to select your country After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels were found and if so how many You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or RETURN In this case no channels are set f you execute a Replace Channels command any timer recordings set for D TV channels will be erased Add New Channels Next Screen Automatically scans for new digital channels After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels were found and if so how many You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or RETURN In this case no new channels are set Channel Sort Next Screen Use this screen to sort channel presets into your prefered order Use the 1 4 9 buttons to highlight the channel
58. Synchronized amp mode operations By connecting a component to this unit with an HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode which allows you to synchronize the following operations Displays on the plasma television when you mute or adjust the volume of this unit e The input of this unit is automatically changed when playback occurs on a connected component Even if you change this unit s input to a device that is not connected by HDMI the synchronized amp mode remains in effect Dy pressing GENRE when listening to a source from a supplied HDD DVD recorder the most appropriate listening mode is automatically selected page 33 Canceling synchronized amp mode If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected via HDMI to a plasma television or while you are watching a IV programme the power for this unit is turned off Additional information Chapter 11 Additional information A Important Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen as shown below RECEIVER F S SURR Dimming the display You can choose to dim the display of the display unit if you find it too bright 1 Press SETUP gt 2 Select System Setup then press ENTER 3 Select Dimmer then press ENTER 4 Select Dimmer Light or Dimmer Dark then press ENTER to confirm Setting th
59. TV not manufactured by Pioneer put this setting to Control Off 1 Press SETUP gt 2 Select HDMI Setup then press ENTER gt 3 Select HDMI Ctrl then press ENTER 4 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm Control On Enables the HDMI Control function When this unit s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the HDMI Control function the audio and video output from the HDMI connection are output from the plasma television Control Off The HDMI Control is disabled Synchronized operations cannot be used When this unit s power is turned off audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output Setting the Auto Delay This feature automatically corrects the audio to video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable The audio delay time is automatically adjusted according to the video delay time 1 Press SETUP ee Select HDMI Setup then press ENTER e Em 3 Select Auto Delay then press ENTER e 4 Select A Delay On or A Delay Off then press ENTER to confirm Qr his feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio video synchronizing capability lip syne for HDMI or HDMI Control If you find the automatically set delay ti
60. You can resume playback from the same stopped LCD page 1 point by pressing Play Press IIl Stop again to cancel the resume function m Press to stop playback Video CD only You can resume playback Pauses playback or restarts playback LCD page 1 from the same point by pressing c when paused gt Play Press W Stop again to LCD page 1 cancel the resume function Press to start scanning Press repeatedly 4 gt gt gt m Pauses playback or restarts playback to increase the scanning speed when paused LCD page 1 LCD page 1 m m Press to skip to previous next title Press to start scanning Press repeatedly RM NL to increase the scanning speed LCD page f LCD page 1 While paused press to advance one uu T gt Press to skip to previous next track dad frame Press and hold to start slow motion e m When a PBC menu is displayed press to LCD page 1 playback press repeatedly to change the LCD page 1 display the previous next page slow motion play speed During playback enter a track number Press to display the playback audio type I FI EI ip di aD ress repeatedly to change the playback Lara then press ENTER to skip directly to that p p y g play track LCD page 3 audio type Ei RISE RUM OC MN Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and LA 0 Sead aoan Press to display subtitle information press LCD page 2 ane repeatedly to change subtitle
61. able to re initialize a DVD RW disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder e Once initialized for VR mode recording you can t re initialize a DVD R back to Video mode Note 1 Select Disc Setup from the Home Menu Select Initialize Video Mode VR Mode or Initialize DVD RW D Disc Setup Basic VR Mode gt Start Video Mode gt Start Finalize Initialize DVD RW gt Start Optimize HDD E Select Start It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc except DVD RAM discs which can take up to an hour Initializing Disc Pr 1 HHHHHHHHHEO 1 min left DVD RW Auto Initialize DVD RW Default setting VR Mode Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD RW You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc 1 Select Disc Setup from the Home Menu Select Basic gt DVD RW Auto Init then VR Mode or Video Mode D Disc Setup Basic Input Disc Name OVR Mode Initialize Lock Disc Video Mode Finalize DVD RW Auto Init Optimize HDD 1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder you may not be able to re initialize and or initialize it for Video mode recording Playback Chapter 7 Playback Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on screen displays Navigate these using the cursor
62. affect what is displayed in the Grid Area The Editor Area is mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus system to make any manual changes as necessary You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become available in your area or if you change trom cable to satellite say or move house From the Editor Area you can Display hide channels in the grid switch the channel on off e Select a channel source A TV D TV Ext Rec 1 Ext Rec 2 etc e Enter a channel programme number Switching a channel on off You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor Area 1 Select Editor from the Menu bar Press the Red button to switch channel On or Off grey Press 5 to change Source and Programme Number MyTV Schedule Info Editor D TV 001 D TV 002 D TV 003 D TV 004 a D TV 005 Welcome to GUIDE Plus Ext Rec 1 007 006 D TV 014 Cau D TV 017 One Button Recording 2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you want to switch on or off 3 Press the RED Action button to switch the channel on or off Changing the source and programme number 1 Select Editor from the Menu bar aunt BBC2 25 May 10 10 Source g p 7 Press the Red button to change Source Press the Green button to change Programme Number Press to switch MI channel On or Off grey MyTV Schedule
63. allows you easily to select and tune to a particular programme The Digital EPG screen consists of programme Information Channel List and General Programme List This section describes information displayed in the schedule and information windows Note that the recorder s clock must be set to the correct time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is displayed General Programme List 2 00 12 45 1 Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled forward or backward Time schedule Channel list Highlights the currently selected channel Indicates the programme set for recording a ui A WU N Appears when other programmes often short ones have been scheduled for the same period 7 Programme title 8 Time dividers P Note 1 EPG information is only viewable for D TV programmes that provide e The general programme list may show sections whose bottom right corners have been folded This indicates that other programmes have been scheduled for that period To view the title of such a programme and related information highlight a folded section and then press m w Programme information A W N Ul 00 00 12 00 XX Channel number Station name Programme title Appear when other programmes have been scheduled for the same period Programme schedule Programme genre EPG information Using the Digital EPG Using the Digital EPG you
64. analog audio cable For digital audio connect to DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 on the receiver subwoofer To use the HDMI Control function when you are connected to a supported Pioneer plasma television you must connect via HDMI You must first set TV Input to switch the audio from a plasma television with the HDMI Control function or to switch the input source of this unit to TV audio and operate your TV with the supplied remote control For more information see Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs on page 22 and Audio input settings from Plasma televisions TV Input on page 46 Connect a TV antenna Connect the TV antenna from your TV to the HDD DVD recorder See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 to connect the antenna Connect the power cord Connect each power cord to the AC inlet on the HDD DVD recorder and the receiver subwoofer Connect each power cord to a wall socket in the following order 1 HDD DVD recorder 2 Receiver subwoofer 3 TV Run the cords that are connected to the side panel of the receiver subwoofer over the back side of the unit and replace the cover on the side panel e After connecting this unit to an AC outlet a 15 second initialization process begins You cannot carry out any operations during initialization The H DMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking K Controls and displays Chapter
65. aspect ratio will be added as a separate title if high speed copying is possible Depending on the title high speed copying may not be possible to DVDs 6 Press to display the command menu panel The command menu panel HDD DVD Video mode 8 WED 29 03 20 00 Wed29 00 Pr2 SP Pr2 7 MON 27 03 21 00 Mon27 08 Pr4 SP Pr4 C 6 SAT 25 03 23 00 Sat25 03 Pr9 SP Pr9 Recent first 4 5 THU 29 03 22 00 Thu23 03 Pr6 SP Pr6 4 WED 22 03 20 00 Wed22 03 Pr2 SP Pr2 e 3 MON 20 03 13 00 Mon20 03 Pr9 SP Pr9 AllGenrs 2 FR 17 0321 00 Fri 17 08 Pra SP Pr4 1 WED 15 03 20 00 Wed15 03 Pr2 SP Pr2 E Wed29 00 Pr2 SP 20 00 1h00m 2 0G Pr2 a e E Sports SP Copy List Total Current DVD Remain 4 38 Co 436 3 7 Select Next to move on to the Title Edit screen l HDD DVD Video mode Title Edit 1 20 00 Wed29 03 Pr2 SP E E 2 20 00 Wed22 03 Pr2 SP Back Next E 20 00 Wed29 03 Pr2 SP ZG 1h00m 2 0G Copy List Total 4 38 i Current DVD Remain 4 38 L 4 DV D R RW e Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution SEP through LP MN1 to MN15 Video Mode Off or MN1 to MNS8 Video Mode On e LP MN9 to MN15 recordings when HD Bilingual recordings D Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes The following title
66. before securing the stand with the screws arrow b Clip the loop onto the stand Black Red Colour coded wire 3 Connect the AM and FM antennas a Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM antenna terminal For each terminal press down on the tab to open insert the wire then release to secure 2 P d e Connect the other end to the colour coded speaker rt terminals on the side of the receiver subwoofer Make sure to insert completely Be careful when inserting the speaker plug as it b Push the FM antenna plug onto the center pin of the must be inserted in the proper direction when being FM antenna socket plugged into one of the terminals Please make sure to connect correctly A A P Note 1 Keep antenna cables away from other cables the display unit receiver subwoofer and HDD DVD recorder e f reception with the supplied antenna is poor see mproving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 35 or Connecting external antennas on page 42 Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna or an external antenna as described on page 43 2 Don t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers television sets or other electrical appliances e f radio reception is poor you may be able improve it by re inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal For best reception do not untwist the AM loop ant
67. both L R C ua Note When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On to DVD R RW Video mode to DVD R RW or onthe LPCM setting only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded In this case decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting see Bilingual Recording on page 155 Switching between TV and DVD When the recorder is stopped or recording you can choose whether to have the audio video from the built in TV tuner or external input play on your TV DVD mode or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to TV mode During playback or when a menu is being displayed on screen the sound and video is always routed to your TV and is unaffected by the TV DVD mode setting Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature e LCD page 2 Switch between TV mode and DVD mode EG application screen will also be recorded To avoid this quit the application first then start recording It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress 2 This function is not available when subtitle display is active Qeri OO ZO QM Setting the picture quality recording time DVD VR DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM HDD Before starting a recording you will usually want to set the picture quality recording time There are six standard sett
68. buttons and ENTER To go back one level from any screen use the RETURN button Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD DVD discs Video CDs Super VCDs WMA MP3 DivX discs and CDs although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded Many functions are not available when a Video CD is playing in PBC mode Start playback from the Disc Navigator screen for non PBC playback see Using the Disc Navigator with playback only discs on page 107 For discs that contain JPEG picture files see 7he PhotoViewer on page 140 Basic playback ALL This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs DVD CD etc and for playback of video from the HDD A Important Throughout this manual the term DVD means any kind of playable or recordable DVD If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc itis specified e Some DVD Video DVD R and DVD RW discs dont allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc This is not a malfunction 1 PMR LCD page 1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback f playing video from the HDD skip to step 3 below e Select DVD for any kind of disc playback 2 e Front panel Load a disc Load a disc with the label side facing up using the disc tray guide to align the disc if you re loadin
69. can check the schedule of digital TV programmes view information about desired programmes and or select programmes 1 Press to display the Digital EPG screen The EPG screen updates automatically if the EPG data is acquired successfully If not the Digital EPG screen shows a blank image 2 Select a TV programme 2 00 12 45 Press Ie 1 LCD page 7 to skip to the next or previous channel list page e Information about the selected programme appears in the information window o watch a programme currently on air select the programme then press ENTER You can check information about programmes scheduled up to one week ahead depending on conditions Depending on conditions it may take some time to acquire EPG data 3 Press to view more information about the selected programme Detailed information appears in the schedule window If the screen contains further information More is displayed Note 05 Using the digital electronic programme guide To quit the display of detailed information press INFO again or RETURN 13 40 14 05 4 Press to exit the Digital EPG screen Setting timer programmes Using the Digital EPG it s easy to set digital TV programmes for recording 1 Press to display the Digital EPG screen ems 2 Select a programme 2 00 12 45 e Select a programme currently on air press ENTER to close the Digital EPG screen and watc
70. clean a disc more thoroughly Never use benzine thinner or other cleaning agents including products designed for cleaning vinyl records Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly When you re not using a disc return it to its case and store upright Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold humid or hot environments including under direct sunlight Don t glue paper or put stickers onto the disc or use a pencil ball point pen or other sharp tipped writing instrument These could all damage the disc e For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs Do not load more than one disc into the recorder Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder If you can see that a disc is cracked chipped warped or otherwise damaged don t risk using it you could end up damaging the recorder This recorder is designed for use with conventional fully circular discs only Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs Cleaning the pickup lens The HDD DVD recorder s lens should not become dirty in normal use but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt consult your nearest Pioneer authorized service center Although lens cleaners are commercially available we do n
71. displays HDD DVD Recorder Top of the unit PLAY STOP REC STOP REC 1 1 1 OPEN CLOSE e The image above represents when the front door is open 1 STANDBY ON REC Press to switch the recorder on into standby Press to start recording Press repeatedly to set the 2 Front panel inputs recording time in 30 minute blocks See Front panel on page 9 for more information on these C STOP REC Press to stop recording 3 COMMON INTERFACE slot Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode 7 Front panel display scrambled D TV channels See Common Interface on See Display on page 16 for details page 17 8 HDD indicator 4 Disctray Lights when the hard disk HDD is selected DVD indicator 5 4 OPEN CLOSE Press to open close the disc tray Lights when the DVD drive is selected EPG indicator 6 izan start or restart playback Lights when the EPG data is downloading E STOP HDMI indicator Press to stop playback Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI HDCP compatible component Display oa ao P pume P omea puma P ouma agua Duma Fuera Pars RW 222H agga B2228M nl223 6 ali ag 3223 M gees opadoM opgin ngado 8 G 1e mu 4 page 98 Lights during playback blinks when playback is paused Lights when a timer recording has been set 2 Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but Lights when copying there isn t a recordable disc loaded or the timer has
72. e YNR Adjusts the amount of noise reduction NR applied to the Y brightness component e CNR Adjusts the amount of noise reduction NR applied to the C colour component Detail Adjusts how sharp edges appear White AGC Turn on for automatic white level adjustment White Level Adjusts the intensity of white Black Level Adjusts the intensity of black 1 When an HDMI component is not connected the settings for the digital tuner cannot be changed ED The Video Adjust menu Black Setup Corrects the standard reference black level 525 Input Line System only Hue Adjusts overall balance between red and green Chroma Level Adjusts how rich the colours appear Adjust the currently selected setting 5 Press to exit You can now use the preset for any other input or the built in TV tuner Ky tip o see more of the picture as you adjust different settings press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs Choosing a preset 1 With a disc playing or paused press to display the Home Menu Select Video Adjust Select a setting There are six presets available TV suitable for LCD and cathode ray tube TVs e PDP suitable for plasma television screens Professional suitable for professional monitors e Memory1 user pr
73. eee eee eee ees Resetting the recorder s sascuracuc arai cci ici ic Specifications SDVR LX70D ewww rar Before you start Gm Chapter 1 Before you start Symbols used in this manual The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc HDD DVD DVD Video HDD Any type of DVD disc recordable or playback only finalized or not Commercially produced DVD finalized Video mode DVD R RW DVD Video Video mode DVD R RW unfinalized DVD VR DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM CD Video CD Super VCD WMA MP3 DivX ALL Note VR mode DVD R RW DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM Audio CD Video CD Super VCD WMA or MP3 files DivX files All of the above Disc content format playback compatibility Compatible media e DVD RW ver 1 1 1x 1x to 2x ver 1 2 2x to 4x 2x to 6x DVD R ver 2 0 1x 1x to 4x 1x to 8x 1x to 16x ver 2 1 1x to 8x 1x to 16x e DVD RW 1x to 2 4x 1x to 4x 3 3x to 8x e DVD R 1xto 2 4x 1x to 4x 1x to 8x 1x to 16x DVD RAM ver 2 0 2x ver 2 1 2x 2x to 3x 2x to bx ver 2 2 2x 2x to 3x 2x to 5x DVD R DL ver 3 0 2x to 4x 2x to 8x DVD R DL 2 4x 2 4x to 8x Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD RW ver 1 2 discs and or corrupt the data on the disc If you want to share DVD RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder writer we recommend
74. equalization channel 2 delay channel level and standing wave are set to off When MCACC Effect is off the channel delay and channel level can be adjusted manually and the settings stored separately from when MCACC Effect Is on MCACC Effect is set to on automatically after Auto MCACC setup is used Using Midnight Loudness and Quiet listening modes The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels The Loudness listening feature can be used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low volume levels The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source 1 Souno Press to open the sound menu e Em Select Tone then press ENTER a 3 Select Midnight Loudness or Quiet then press ENTER to confirm e To cancel the Midnight Loudness or Quiet listening modes select Bass Treble kA Note 1 While playing back DTS HD over 88 2 kHz or Dolby TrueHD over 88 2 k Treble is selected 2 While playing back DTS HD over 88 2 kHz or Dolby TrueHD over 88 2 k Adjusting the bass and treble Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone 1 Souno Press to open the sound menu e Em Select Tone then press ENTER lt gt Select Bass Treble then press ENTER e Selecting Bass Treble cancels the Midnight Loudness and Quiet listen
75. it For detailed information please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and or software END Before you start DivX video compatibility Div DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX video codec from DivX Inc Keeping the same terminology as DVD Video individual DivX video files are called Titles When naming files titles on a disc prior to burning keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order e Official DivX9 Certified product e Plays all versions of DivX video including DivX 6 with standard playback of DivX9 media files File extensions avi and divx these must be used for the recorder to recognize DivX video files Note that all files with the avi extension are recognized as MPEG4 but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder File structure Up to 99 folders or 999 files DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of DivX Inc and are used under license DivX VOD content DivX In order to play DivX VOD video on demand content on this recorder you first need to register the recorder with your DivX VOD content provider You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code which you submit to your provider Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VO
76. local authorities for the correct method of disposal By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health K058 A En Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel IMPORTANT THE MOULDED PLUG This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 Check for the ASTA mark e or the BSI mark Y on the body of the fuse If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead a
77. menu is set to GUIDE Plus The GUIDE Plus system The GUIDE Plus system is a free interactive on screen television programming guide 1 The system provides programme listings for all major channels one touch recording searching by genre recommendations according to your profile and more The GUIDE Plus system is a convenient way to find out what s on right now or during the coming week by channel or by genre The GUIDE Plus system also allows you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections quickly and easily In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus system and download the TV listings information If you haven t already done this please turn to Setting up the GUIDE Plus amp system on page 71 before proceeding Note Using the GUIDE Plus system All the various features and areas are colour coded for ease of navigation All screens with the exception of some setup screens have the following common elements C Sov 0 Grid displays programme listings by channel and time Press 4 to use Press gt for Search Grid EN TV Schedule Tue 25 10 00 i gt Welcome to Ne Fimbles Starship gt GUIDE Plus two Thrisa Friends gt itv l This Alias UAD al 4 Sally Jessy Raph Our b Go five Armageddon gt One Button NewsatTen The Secret Recording slone Ne
78. on Off e This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial antenna If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto the aerial may not be connected properly or it may be shorted In either case check the connection and try making the setting again D TV Language Next Screen From this screen you can set your Primary and Secondary Audio preference for multilingual digital broadcasts your Primary and Secondary Subtitle preference for programmes that are broadcast with subtitles and your Teletext language preference Use the t 4 buttons to highlight a field then use the buttons to change it The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Analog Tuner Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels in your area After auto scan has finished the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which programme numbers You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting option below Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen Download from TV f your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your TV is tuned to via the SCART input Select your country and then wait for the download to complete After the download is complete the channel mapping screen appears as above See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more information
79. or damage to the recorder See also Disc content format playback compatibility on page 5 for detailed disc compatibility information Recording to DVD R DL DVD R DL discs Recording to DVD R DL DVD R DL discs is generally the same as recording to regular single layer discs however please note the following points When the recorder switches from the first layerto the second during recording a DVD R DL Video mode disc a new title is automatically started on the new layer Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD R DL Video mode disc If the 99th title is being recorded when the layer is switched recording will stop You cannot play record additional material to edit or finalize a DVD R DL or DVD R DL disc that has been recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD recorder About HDD recording Recording to the hard disk drive HDD is very flexible you have the full choice of recording quality options including manual mode and of course you can record erase and re record as many times as you like The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it even using the higher quality recording modes 1 Some DVD players such as some Pioneer models are compatible with VR mode discs Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD R DL disc NE Roding OOS O A Important
80. panel Use the f 4 amp and ENTER buttons to navigate the menus Recent first e e LCD page 1 When in the title list press to display the previous next page if there are more titles than can be displayed pise LCD page 3 Press to change the title information displayed in the title list HDD by Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens f you are editing a DVD R RW VR mode or DVD RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting Play List from the view options panel press then select Play List from the view options then Play List 2 Disc Navigator DVD mire Style NH 23 00 FRI 3 12 jg m D Wl 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 SP oe 2h00m 1 0G RR 20 00 FRI 3 12 vu age 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pro SP E Original V 2h00m 1 0G gt Em 22 00 THU 2 12 Pr7 SP 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr7 SP 1h00m 1 0G an r 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr2 SP SP nae 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP Reman 1h00m 1 08 Oh30m e Titles on the HDD marked with a BY icon are recently recorded titles that haven t yet been played 3 NAVIGATOR Press to exit the Disc Navigator Editing accuracy Some editing commands ask you whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy Video Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing Frame Accurate Editing is very precise The edit point is accurate to the exact frame you choose However this accu
81. play It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc the opposite side to that being played will be scratched Scratched discs may not be playable The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product DVD Audio content will not play For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer Other disc compatibility In addition to DVD this recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types media and formats Playable discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc and or disc packaging shown below Note however that some disc types such as recordable CD and DVD may be in an unplayable format see below for further compatibility information Audio CD CD R CD RW fes Se alse DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO Video CD Super Video CD Super VCD cs 4 UE CO Note lt CD R RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD R or CD RW discs Readable formats CD audio Video CD Super VCD ISO 9660 CD ROM containing MP3 WMA JPEG or DivX files SO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant CD physical format Model Mode2 XA Form1 Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder Multi session playback Yes except CD audio and Video CD Super VCD e Unfinalized disc playback CD audio only Compressed audio compatibility e Compatible media DVD ROM DVD R RW DVD 4 R RW DVD RAM CD ROM CD R CD RW
82. pushed out of the terminals allowing the wires to come into contact with each other it places an excessive additional load on the amp This may cause the amp to stop functioning and may even damage the amp Connect the HDD DVD recorder to the receiver subwoofer a Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT 1 jack on the side of the receiver subwoofer Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN jack on the rear of the HDD DVD recorder b Plug the HDMI cable into the HDMI IN 1 jack on the 6 rear of the receiver subwoofer Plug the other end of the cable into the HDMI OUT jack on the rear of the HDD DVD recorder Note that unless the control cable is connected you can t use the remote control with the HDD DVD recorder Connect the receiver subwoofer to your TV Connect the HDMI OUT jack on receiver subwoofer to an HDMI input on your TV You can have audio from the receiver subwoofer as well as audio and video from the HDD DVD recorder output to your TV by connecting with a single HDMI cable Note je Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system 7 Connectan audio cable from your TV to the receiver subwoofer To listen to TV audio on this unit you must connect the TV s audio output to an audio input jack on this unit You can connect by either a digital optical or
83. recordings you want to keep to recordable DVD Press ENTER to continue 13 Select Finish Setup to exit the Setup Navigator or Go Back if you want to start again Setup is complete Finish Setup Go Back That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator e f there are blank channels with no station you can set these to skip using the manual channel setting See Manual CH Setting on page 154 For users receiving digital broadcast services This unit can set its internal clock automatically from digital broadcasts However depending on the broadcaster the clock information received may not be accurate Use the following procedure while the recorder is not recording to set the clock manually 1 Press HOME MENU 2 Select Initial Setup gt Basic gt Clock Setting 3 Highlight the time setting 4 Press to display the manual clock setting screen 5 Set the correct time Return to automatic clock setting To return to the automatic clock setting follow the instructions for Replace Channels page 153 Getting started Cm Setting up the GUIDE Plus system This section is only applicable if you chose to use the GUIDE Plus system as the EPG type in step 10 of the Setup Navigator above The GUIDE Plus system is a free interactive on screen television programming guide The system offers programme listings for all major channels one touc
84. shown Before you start Cn Chapter 4 Before you start Switching on The HDD DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches The power switch for the receiver subwoofer is located on the display unit Turn the receiver subwoofer ON SOURCE Turn the HDD DVD Recorder ON only in the HDD DVR mode C C 0 Selected HDD DVR mode See next page for details STANDBY ON Receiver subwoofer TOP MENU LJ ys DISC NAVIGATOR HDD DVD Recorder The table below shows what needs to be switched on for various system functions Setting up Function Display unit HDD DVD recorder After connecting and installing the HDD DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer complete the steps below to set DVD playback On On the system up for use CD playback On On HDD DVD recorder HDD playback On On Set the date and time TV channel tuning and the type au uoo of TV in the Setup Navigator page 68 Radio On Off Receiver subwoofer Timer recording Off On e Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the surround sound page 30 04 Before you start Basic operation This manual is split into two parts one covering using the receiver Subwoofer the other using the HDD DVD recorder Below are some common operations and where to find them explained in this manual Operating the remote control The supplied remote control can control not only the receiv
85. subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver Two modes Cinema and Music are available using DTS Neo 6 with two channel SOUICEeS Troubleshooting DTS 96 24 DTS 96 24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz 24 bit audio using a DTS 96 24 decoder This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders This means that DVD players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5 1 channel decoder DTS EXPRESS DTS EXPRESS is a low bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5 1 channels with fixed data transfer rates This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and secondary audio on Blu ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data preserving audio quality DIS HD Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24 5 Mbps in the Blu ray disc format 18 0 Mbps in the HD DVD format which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD These high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz 24 bit 1 1 channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality of the original sound DTS HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as in
86. the channel information 25 GS Teletext mode Selects a page 26 I II Sets the sound multiplex mode Controls and displays Operating a Pioneer Blu ray Disc player DISC NAVIGATOR 1 SOURCE Switches the power for a Blu ray disc player to On Standby 2 PAGE lt gt Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present 3 TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR Press to display the top menu of a BD ROM or DVD Video disc When playing a DVD R RW disc press to display exit the Disc Navigator 4 MENU BD ROM Press to display hide the pop up menu DVD Video Press to display the disc menu if there is one 5 t e cursor buttons and ENTER Use to navigate on screen displays and menus Press ENTER to select an option or execute a command 6 HOME MENU Press to display the player s Home Menu access most of the player s functions 7 RETURN Press to return to a previous screen 8 Colour RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE buttons Use to navigate BD ROM menus LCD touch screen 9 AUDIO Press to select the audio channel or language SUBTITLE Press to select a subtitle display amp ANGLE Press to change the camera angle during BD ROM or DVD Video movie multi angle scene playback 10 Playback controls Press to start or resume playback s Press to stop playback you can resume playback by pressing PB lI Press to pause playback press aga
87. unit does not automatically switch off if your plasma television is switched on upon completion of timer recording When using the Video Control function of an external component Child lock settings page 99 When you connect a SCART cable and an HDMI cable to the same plasma television simultaneously If you want to use an HDMI cable other than the supplied HDMI cable use the one that supports the HDMI 1 3 specification The HDMI Control functions may not operate properly if you do not use an HDMI cable that supports the HDMI 1 3 specification Controls may not function properly in certain situations such as immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable turn this unit s power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected component If you experience any problems set HDMI Control to On for all connected units and then display the pictures stored on this unit on your plasma television to improve the situations We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI control compatible components other than those made by Pioneer Connecting a DV camcorder You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with DV output to the front panel DV IN jack A Important his jack is for connection to DV equipment only It is not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D VHS video decks mm eo i vO wG Qs
88. when recording a bilingual broadcast On the Video Mode Off setting both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback See also Bilingual Recording on page 155 When the recording mode is set to XP you cannot change HDD Recording Format Playback TV Screen Size 4 3 Letter Box Select if you have a standard 4 3 TV and prefer the letter box format presentation for widescreen material 4 3 Pan amp Scan Select if you have a standard 4 3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presentation for widescreen material 16 9 o Select if you have a widescreen 16 9 TV Your TV settings determine how 4 3 material will look Selecting 4 3 Letter Box or 4 3 Pan amp Scan does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override this setting Still Picture Field Produces a stable generally shake free image Frame Produces sharp image but may be prone to shake Auto e Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image Seamless Playback On Playback is smooth but with a trade off against the accuracy of the edit points Off e You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Play List This setting applies to HDD DVD R RW VR and DVD RAM playback Angle Indicator One A camera icon appears on screen during multi angle scenes on a DVD Video disc Off Nothing is indicated on screen when a multi angle scene is showing Parental Lock
89. you want to move press ENTER Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to move the channel preset to then press ENTER again If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen you can select the next previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks and pressing ENTER Channel Options Next Screen From this screen you can skip or lock channels Locked channels will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be watched Use the f 4 9 buttons to highlight a preference box and press ENTER to toggle the preference To enter this screen input the parental lock password when prompted if one has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental lock password Auto Skip Off e No channels are automatically skipped Radio Radio channels are skipped when selecting channels Data Data channels are skipped when selecting channels Radio amp Data Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels Signal Check NextScreen Use this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels Use the amp buttons to change the RF channel select Add New Channels then press ENTER to scan for new channels press HOME MENU to exit Aerial Power On Power is supplied to the connected aerial antenna when this recorder is on or in standby Auto Power is supplied to the connected aerial antenna only when this recorder is
90. 00m 1 0G 1 V er 19 00 MON 29 11 De e Ll 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP Remain aie 1h00m 1 06 Oh30m Genre Name HDD Use this command to rename one of the five user definable genres Free 1 to Free 5 Select Genre Name from the command menu panel 2 Disc Navigator HDD 10Titles 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr4 S 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 S play Erase Edit 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr9 S NE 2000 Fri 3 12 Pr9 9 Genre Name So 22 00 THU 2 12 Pr7 M 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr 7 All Genre Multi Mode 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP 1h00m 1 0G 24 Disc Navigator HDD 10Titles ug 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr 4 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr 4 4 Free2 7 amp Free3 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr Free4 EE 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr Recent first j Free5 a o e 8 22 00 THU 2 12 Pr Cancel i 22 00 Thu 2 12 P All Genres 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr 2 DD 9 00 MON 29 r SP 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP Remain 1h00m 1 0G 30h30m p Input a name for the genre The name can be up to 12 characters long 2 Input Genre Name ABCDEFGHIJKLM em NOPQRSTUVWXYZ AARAAAKECEEEETTTTA bNO606000000U0Yx5 8 9 0123456789 lt gt amp x e y sxztl i CERNS OE SEO 2 9 x nos 9 RTA VATA OK Clear Space Select OK to enter the name and exit Multi Mode HDD Multi Mode allows you to selec
91. 00m DVD Rem 0h35m Copy Once Finalized Disc Name Comedy shows DVD Mode Indicates copy protected material Indicates a multi angle scene 7 gt Play 3 2 0 00 15 en DVD R Video ChapterTime 0 00 21 Chapter Total 0h01m52s nnnm 4 32Mbps Title Name 21 11 Football match Indicates the data transfer rate tip e See Switching camera angles above for more on multi angle scene switching When using the simultaneous play and record feature the display shows information for playback only Cad o During real time copy the copy source playback information is displayed e The Video mode DVD R RW displays become the same as a DVD Video disc once the disc is finalized The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12 cm 4 7 GB disc at the displayed record setting Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0 1 96 shorter than the actual time This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused Copy Once or Can t Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays These indicate that the broadcast TV programme contains copy control information ENT Playing and recording from a DV camcorder Chapter 8 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder connected to the
92. 209 Bengali bn 0214 Tibetan bo 0215 Breton br 0218 Catalan ca 0301 Corsican co 0315 Welsh cy 0325 Danish da 0401 Bhutani dz 0426 Esperanto eo 0515 Estonian et 0520 Basque eu 0521 Persian fa 0601 Finnish fi 0609 Fiji fj 0610 Faroese fo 0615 Frisian fy 0625 Irish ga 0701 Scots Gaelic gd 0704 Galician gl 0712 Guarani gn 0714 Gujarati gu 0721 Hausa ha 0801 Hindi hi 0809 Croatian hr 0818 Hungarian hu 0821 Armenian hy 0825 Interlingua ia 0901 Interlingue ie 0905 Inupiak ik 0911 Indonesian in 0914 Icelandic is 0919 Hebrew iw 0923 Yiddish ji 1009 Javanese jw 1023 Georgian ka 1101 Kazakh kk 1111 Greenlandic kl 1112 Cambodian km 1113 Kannada kn 1114 Korean ko 1115 Kashmiri ks 1119 Kurdish ku 1121 Kirghiz ky 1125 Latin la 1201 Lingala In 1214 Laotian lo 1215 Lithuanian It 1220 Latvian lv 1222 alagasy mg 1307 aori mi 1309 acedonian mk 1311 ayalam ml 1312 ngolian mn 1314 davian mo 1315 rathi mr 1318 ay ms 1319 tese mt 1320 Burmese my 1325 auru na 1401 epali ne 1405 Occitan oc 1503 Oromo om 1513 Oriya or 1518 Panjabi pa 1601 Pashto Pushto ps 1619 Quechua qu 1721 Rhaeto Romance rm 1813 Kirundi rn 1814 Romanian ro 1815 Kinyarwanda rw 1823 Sanskrit sa 1901 Sindhi sd
93. 43 A 7 Select Copy to DVD from the menu 5 Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel e Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR File names will be PHOT number Note that during copying any timer programmes set to start will not begin and no other operation is possible While Cancel is displayed you can press ENTER to cancel Editing files on the HDD There are a number of commands you can use to edit and organize your pictures stored on the HDD Creating a new folder 1 From the folder list display the menu 2 Select New Folder The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the name F number HI PhotoViewer HDD Select Folder Start Audio Slideshow wT 003 Folders 4 004 Folder4 Folder Options 005 Folder5 Copy to DVD 006 Folder6 BAUR MOdS 007 Folder 008 Folder8 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB here can be up to 999 folders on the HDD Erasing a file or folder 1 Select the file s or folder s you want to erase e To erase multiple files or folders use the Multi Mode see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143 Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it Please be careful e You can t erase files that have been locked Folders containing locked files can t be erased Unlocked files in the folder however will be erased 2 Display the command menu The PhotoViewer Gp
94. 5 Folder6 Folder Folder8 ay 002 Folder2 Files 999 AES G Folder 999 MB 1 3 Select the command you want to apply to all the selected items Note Copying files to a DVD R RW Using this feature you can copy all the files including audio and movie files stored on a connected USB camera to a recordable DVD disc A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc asa Video mode title making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback Once the files have been copied the disc is automatically finalized A Important Usea blank DVD R RW disc or one that has already been initialized for Video mode recording but has nothing yet recorded on it Discs that have already been recorded on as well as CD R RW discs cannot be used After backing up the pictures in your digital camera to DVD we recommend verifying that they have been recorded properly before deleting anything from the camera 1 Press HOME MENU and select PhotoViewer to display the PhotoViewer screen 2 Loada blank or unrecorded Video mode DVD R or DVD RW disc Select Copy Files from a Digital Camera from the menu View Edit Photos on the HDD View Photos on a CD DVD View Photos on a USB Device Copy Files from a Digital Camera 7 Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel Note that during copying any timer programmes set t
95. AQ and troubleshooting 83 05 Using the digital electronic programme guide The Digital EPS SySIOITI 23 drei graria y RR ads 85 Using the Digital EPG acea cise acne ae marae RR n Res 86 Setting timer progrermmiesu s o acs s a i dn Ca Rs 86 Other useful EPG TUNCUONS vss sas s RRRRRRRAERA 90 06 Recording About DVD reordigo sesei um uo eere ris 91 DE TIED TeCOECIDl 02022 cnenewwe dan a xx ee Reds 91 Recorded alio Ladder eu ERE ERE RAE 92 Restrictions on video Tecordintiss sace Res 92 Using the built in A TV and D TV tuners ss 93 Setting the picture quality recording time 95 Basic recording from the TV veda cece ataca acci ew 95 Pause Live TV s eee e404 sora wn CR CC C ow OS 96 ADOUL timer FECOrdINGS a s aren rack RARE ARA 98 Timer recording FAQ idis 4 pex e Een 99 Simultaneous recording and playback Nese Pas qa aac ae C RP RCRORS c CRURA 2 8 100 Recording from an external component 100 Playing your recordings on other DVD players 101 Initializing recordable DVD discs 102 DVD RW Auto Initialize Les 102 07 Playback OGEROCRUC LOI ais uou we qe RR e CCP Re ene 88 103 Basie playback 103 Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs age DS s a unu c rea eee RU e CAE diede 106 Using the Disc Navigator with playback on ASES sasaaa aaun hae dcr dca 107 SCANNING A SCS m C C 108 Playing Mellow qollOlis s 2904 40 02 RR RC tees 109 Frame advance frame
96. All updates are automatic When downloading EPG data the recorder may sound as though it is on This is normal Checking the downloaded data the following day 1 Display the GUIDE Plus screen Grid displays programme listings by channel and time Press to use Press gt for Search Grid 10 00 Search My TV Schedule gt Welcome to Fimbles Starship gt GUIDE Plus Two Thrisa Friends gt itv This Alias The gt Sally Jessy Raph Our b Go Capt five Armageddon gt sxvlone News at Ten The Secret it v 2 Football One Button Recording Emmerdale Homes Polic gt aie You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV listings information Use the buttons to review the list If you notice that there are channels missing or that there are channels in the list that you don t get go to the Editor screen Press f repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted e Press until Editor is highlighted The main area of the screen now shows a list of channels Those that are turned ON are displayed in the grid those that are OFF are hidden Use the fT 4 9 buttons to move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as necessary 2 For any channel that you turn ON the GUIDE Plus system will need to know how it is received the source and on which programme number The source may be the built in tuner of this recorder or an externa
97. C Width 3 setting 2 As this product uses a dual center speaker system you should normally use the C Image 3 setting 3 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams Dolby TrueHD over 88 2 kHz DTS HD over 88 2 kHz or with the channel format of 2 0 DTS Express with the channel format of 2 0 Listening to your system Cm e Ent Show Suitable for musical sources Expanded Creates an extra wide stereo field e TV Surround Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources Advanced Game Suitable for video games Sports Suitable for sports programs Classical Gives a large concert hall type sound Rock Pop Creates a live concert sound for rock and or pop music Unplugged Suitable for acoustic music sources e Ext Stereo Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source using all of your speakers Using Front Stage Surround Advance The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as described on page 6 fal Press to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode The F S SURR indicator lights Press repeatedly to select Focus 5 1ch Wide 5 1ch or Extra Power You cannot select a mode other than Extra Power for some audio streams Focus 5 1ch Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center area where the left and right speakers sound projection converges e Wide 5 1ch Use to provi
98. Copying Tiles to DVD R RW 22 secl 143 Copying selected files to a DVD R RW 144 PONG nies on the HELLs s s sca rcr ea ee KR ES 144 PMO WES S ded pv RLEREEERSEERESZSSAEUU 146 13 The Disc Setup menu Basie Se uIn0Si224 2 5 6s ac eeu RE tee See ee S Initialize SettiNgS a s been eeeee ke BR RS ee cea dad FINGlIZe Senilis weaker RRERAR RR REG Be Optimi HDD NT raza ee euna sa RRi 14 The Video Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and exrermal INPUT sacs rura erac E cee DARAN Setting the picture quality for disc playback 15 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup Menu qcacscacacacaoe ee wae Selecting other languages for language options Using Software Update Digital tuner 16 Additional information Minimum COB YING MES oss a aw unten se oe x adie Manual recording modes aaas cece eee eens TTOUDISSNOOUNG uu o E duci di eee ws If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working On screen OISDIAVS 14a dde hr ERE EE E EERERERA Front panel displays a eas dard did d dodi ty Language Code liste acu sc RE een eee nae eae Country Area code TIBI s a aucacacacararcacie n in Roe Screen sizes and CISC formats 22522c6ceeeeu ed Handling ISOS PC Cleaning the pickup LENS uaa omnes Cleaning the recorder s exterior ee eee eee eee Condensate aa a e ITI Lt 11 D FINS Oft INStGINON S 3o 96099 JD 309 f eee Moving the recorder
99. D content the remaining number of plays is shown on screen and you then have the option of playing the disc thereby using up one of the remaining plays or stopping If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content for example content that has zero remaining plays the message Rental Expired is displayed If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays then you may load the disc into your recorder and play the content as often as you like and no message will be displayed A Important DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system This restricts playback of content to specific registered devices e f you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for this recorder the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play Resetting the recorder as described in Resetting the recorder on page 175 will not cause you to lose your registration code JPEG file compatibility Compatible formats Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2 2 still image files File format used by digital still cameras Sampling ratio 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 2 0 Horizontal resolution 160 to 5120 pixels Vertical resolution 120 to 3840 pixels Progressive JPEG compatible No File extensions jpg jpeg jpe jif jfif must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files do not use for other file types File structure The recorder can load up to 99 folders 999 files at one time if there
100. DVD R RW Video mode discs or DVD R RW discs The data is copied first to the hard disk drive then on to another recordable DVD disc 1 Select Copy then Disc Back up from the Home Menu Select a backup option ie Disc Back up Start new disc back up Resume writing data Erase back up data There are three backup options Start new disc back up Start making a backup of a disc Resume writing data Record the backup data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD Erase back up data Frase the backup data on the HDD 3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode DVD R RW discs finalized DVD R or DVD RW discs excluding DVD R DL DVD R DL discs 2 Disc Back up No disc Please load a disc to be backed up 1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High Speed Copy for copying to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW the chapter markers of the original are not copied Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals according to the Auto Chapter setting see also Auto Chapter Video on page 157 and Auto Chapter DVD R RW on page 158 4 2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD Due exactly fill a disc 3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy this mode does not always Copying and backup
101. Download from TV e Ifthe Download from TV option appears grayed out check the connections to your TV and try again Depending on your TV you might have to switch off and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it back in and switching it on again 5 Follow the on screen instructions Using the recorder s internal tuner for Pause Live TV If you haven t connected to your TV using a SCART cable or your TV is not compatible with AV Link you can use the recorder s internal tuner for the Pause Live TV 1 Press HOME MENU 2 Select Initial Setup gt Options2 gt Pause Live TV gt Recorder s Tuner See Pause Live TV on page 160 to do this You can record the channel selected on the recorder Operation table TV DVD mode of DVR DVR source Viewing source Pause Live TV function button Using Pause Live TV 1 LCD page 1 Start recording the current TV channel Recording continues with playback paused Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording to start 2 gt Press to start playback You can also use the scan buttons lt q lt gt gt pause IM and stop Il all without affecting the recording 3 LEd Press to stop the recording The operation is slightly different depending on the viewing source See the Operation table below for details tip When the Pause Live TV setting see page 160 is set to TV s Tuner you can press P LIVE TV while the rec
102. ETURN button DV Auto Copy DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the contents of a DV source to the HDD or a DVD 1 Makesure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack Also set the camcorder to VIR mode 2 WU LCD page 7 Set the recording quality e See Setting the picture quality recording time on page 95 for detailed information 3 From the Initial Setup menu check that the DV audio input is setup as you require See DV Input on page 155 for more on this Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them see Audio n on page 155 4 Select DV then DV Auto Copy from the Home Menu DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VIR mode with a tape loaded Select Record to Hard Disk Drive or Record to DVD The DV tape is rewound to the beginning Once it is rewound the DV tape is played from the beginning and copied to either the HDD or a DVD e f there is a gap of two minutes or more between recorded contents the copying process is automatically stopped Once copying is finished the DV tape is automatically rewound Tocancel the copying process press STOP REC LCD page 1 for more than three seconds ENT Playing and recording from a DV camcorder About automatic finalization If you use a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW About DV disc for copying it will automatically be finalized aft
103. G audio decoder Audio DRC On Switches on Audio DRC Dynamic Range Control Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume Off Switches off Audio DRC Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital n this case adjust the dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer see Dynamic Range Control on page 38 Language OSD Language English e Sets the language of the on screen displays to English available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on screen displays On Screen Display and D TV Language will both reflect this setting Audio Language English e Sets the default audio language for DVD Video playback to English available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVD Video playback Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed See Selecting other languages for language options on page 162 Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language Also some discs override the Audio Language preference Subtitle Language English e Sets the default subtitle language for DVD Video playback to English available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for DVD Video playback Other Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones listed See Selecting other l
104. GEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http www pioneer co uk or http www pioneer eu PIONEER CORPORATION 4 1 Meguro 1 Chome Meguro ku Tokyo 153 8654 Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC P O BOX 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 300 Allstate Parkway Markham Ontario L3R OP2 Canada TEL 1 877 283 5901 905 479 4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium TEL 03 570 05 11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 704 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 178 184 Boundary Road Braeside Victoria 3195 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A DE C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 9178 4270 K002 B En Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright 2007 Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved lt ARB7384 A gt Printed in
105. IAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION EQUIPMENT OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS SYSTEM 1 Display the GUIDE Plus setup menu Caune BBC2 25 May 10 10 amp Hom ga Press 4 or to select Then press ENTER to confirm Welcome to GUIDE Plus aunt One Button Recording amet Choose item to set up Language Country Postal Code External Receiver 1 External Receiver 2 External Receiver 3 English United Kingdom None None None None The language and country settings are already set to whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator N Welcome to GUIDE Plus aumt One Button Recording aug gt Highlight Postal Code Choose item to set up Language Country Postal Code External Receiver 1 External Receiver 2 External Receiver 3 Press 4 or to select amp or to move Then press 2 ZA ENTER to confirm Welcome to GUIDE Plus Caunet One Button Recording amet Postal Code Please enter your code Hom English United Kingdom None None None None 03 Getting started The system uses your postal code to identify which TV listings data is correct for the area in which you live so it is important that you enter it correctly 4 Ifyou are using an external receiver such as a satellite receiver with the supplied G LINK cable complete t
106. Info J Editor D TV 002 D TV 003 D TV 004 D TV 005 Ext Rec 1 007 D TV 006 D TV 014 D TV 017 Welcome to GUIDE Plus One Button Recording amt 2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel you want to make a change to 3 Press the RED Action button to change the channel source or the GREEN Action button to enter a programme number Each press of the RED Action button changes the channel source A TV D TV Ext Rec 1 etc To set a programme number use the number buttons to enter a programme number then press ENTER When set to A TV or D TV make sure that the programme number matches the preset number of this recorder for what you want to record The Setup Area The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus system for your particular region TV reception conditions and so on Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide Cn Making changes to your GUIDE Plus setup 1 Select Setup from the Menu bar BBC2 25 May 10 10 i 7 Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen Schedule Info Editor Setup Welcome to GUIDE Plus Basic Setup Host Channel Setup GUIDE Plus System Information aet One Button Recording avet 2 Highlight the part you want to change Caunet BBC2 25 May 10 10 p Home CEP wa Press 4 or w to select Then press ENTER to confirm Choose item to set up Language English Country United Kingdom Welcome to Postal
107. Manual CH Setting Next Screen Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto tuning Select your country then proceed to the manual channel setting screen e Change channel presets using the CH buttons LCD page 2 o skip the displayed channel because there is no station assigned to that channel change the Skip setting to On e Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country or region e Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current channel preset o manually fine tune the channel change the AFT setting to Off then adjust the Level setting e Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the current channel preset e f the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder connected to the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER set the Decoder setting to On Channel Swapping Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together Select two presets to swap then press ENTER Video In Out Input Colour System Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input and the built in TV tuner Use the CH or INPUT buttons LCD page 2 to change the preset or external input On the default Auto setting the record
108. NY 215 TATUNG 221 TELEFUNKEN 222 223 224 225 THOMSON 226 227 THORN 228 TOSHIBA 231 232 UNIVERSUM 235 W HOUSE 239 WATSON 244 YAMAHA 245 246 247 248 249 PIONEER 001 002 Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default 1 Switch the system on 2 Press and hold INPUT SELECTOR then press the STANDBY ON button on the display unit The next time you switch on all the system settings should be reset Installation and maintenance Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location Do V Use in a well ventilated room vy Place on a solid flat level surface such as a table shelf or stereo rack Don t X Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity including near radiators and other heat generating appliances X Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight X Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment X Place directly on top of an amplifier or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use X Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference especially if the television uses an indoor antenna X Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam X Use on a thick rug or carpet or cover with cloth this ma
109. PC function The Mass Storage Class MSC device should be FAT compatible Note that if the device is partitioned this recorder may not recognize it Note that although multi slot card readers can be used the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted To read another card remove all the cards and insert the card to be read again Using a USB hub Usea hub compatible with USB 1 1 and or 2 0 Use an independently powered hub bus powered hubs may not work reliably In the event of unreliable operation with the hub we recommend plugging the device directly into the recorder s USB port Operation may become unreliable if too many devices are connected to the hub In this case try unplugging some devices If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for the devices connected communication can become unreliable In this case disconnect one or more devices then perform a USB restart See Restart USB Device on page 160 Using a USB printer Use a PictBridge compatible printer Using a USB keyboard Do not use a PS 2 keyboard connected using a PS 2 USB adapter Using a PC e Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB to copy WMA and MP3 files For more information see Connect PC on page 135 To use Connect PC with this device your PC must run either the Windows XP Home Edition SP2 Windows XP Professional SP2 or Windows Vista Home Premium operating system and be a
110. PDC is off the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality MN4 for DVD R RW then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead f there is very little free space left on the HDD an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully e Ifthe HDD is being used for playback or high speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start the new timer recording will not replace the old one However the next time the timer recording starts both of the older two programmes will be erased 3 his mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc Can also be used when recording to HDD 4 f you set the timer recording to use VPS PDC you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly For non VPS PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby Optimized Recording will not work if VPS PDC is on Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS PDC VPS PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input or when the recording mode is set to AUTO 5 You cannot set an EPG Link when recording mode is set to AUTO You cannot change the CH Date Start Stop Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On When you have EPG Link set to On and you s
111. Pi Approx 2h Long Play il le one eder cn ninr diener i eee ao Approx 4 h Extended Pl y EP asad auader arer riire eres Approx 6h Super Long Play SLP LE gue E t RH Approx 8 h Super Extended Play SEP 005 Approx 10 h DVD R RW DVD RAM only Manual Mode MN DVD R RW RAM 0 0 ce Approx 1 h to 13h belli Pr Approx 1 hto8h DVD R DL DVD R DL FACAR ET Approx 1 h 51 m Standatrd Play GP cu eur d ne atc a Approx 3h 35 m Long Play LP uo exaeiuie y PYd rra ndani Approx h 11m Extended Play EP 00 e eee Approx 10 h 46 m Super Long Play SLP ia uaa uiam ei Approx 14h 21m Super Extended Play SEP Approx 17 h 57 m DVD R DL only Manual Mode MN DVD R IDE sis aucta ke cee 34 4s Approx 1 h 51 m to24 h SEEDS aac tion ipee ie Approx 1 h 51 mto 14h 21 m Timer Programes ecu uc CR st x es 1 month 32 programmes COCK sore wed baia Quartz lock 24 hour digital display Tuner analog Receivable channels SECAM B G PAL B G PALI Frequency Channel Frequency Channel VHF low 47 MHz to 89 MHz E2 to E4 44 MHz to 89 MHz AtoC XtoZ XtoZ VHF high 104MHzto300 MHz E5toE12 104 MHz to 300 MHz D to J S1 to S20 11 19 M1 to M10 S1 to S20 U1 to U10 Hyper 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 UHF 470 MHz to 862 MHz 21 to E69 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 SECAM D K SECAM L PAL D K Frequency Channel Fr
112. Pioneer sound vision Soul Operating Instructions HARD DISK DRIVE COMPATIBLE DVD iat LL gt RECORDER DVD ReWritable ges Caup Divx DIGITAL AUDIO GEMSTAR COMPACT EE ViDEO D 3 Himi o iPod o gracenote e Audio Multi channel Receiver Subwoofer SX LX70SW Satellite Speaker SSP LX7OST HDD DVD Recorder SDVR LX70D Accessory Box AS LX70 HDD DVD Recorder Home Cinema System LX Thank you for buying this Pioneer product Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly After you have finished reading the instructions put them in a safe place for future reference IMPORTANT CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol CAUTION The exclamation point within an equilateral within an equilateral triangle is intended to TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC triangle is intended to alert the user to the alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR presence of important operating and dangerous voltage within the product s BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS maintenance servicing instructions in the enclosure that may be of sufficient INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIE literature accompanying the appliance magnitude to constitute a risk of electric SERVICE PERSONNEL shock to persons
113. RDS information Each press changes the display as follows e Radio Text RT Messages sent by the radio station For example atalk radio station may provide a phone number as RT Program Service Name PS The name of the radio station Program Type PTY This indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast Search PTY search see below Current tuner frequency Searching for RDS programs You can search for a program type listed above 1 Press to select the FM band 2 ise Press repeatedly until Search appears in the display 3 Select the program type you want to hear 4 Start the search The system searches the station presets for a match If it finds one searching stops for five sec 5 Ifyou want to keep listening to the station press ENTER within the five seconds If you don t press ENTER searching resumes 1 In addition there are three other program types Test Alarm and No Type Alarm and Test are used for emergency announcements You can t search for these but the tuner will switch automatically to this R found DS broadcast signal No Type appears when a program type cannot be 2 If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll some characters may be displayed incorrectly f you see No Radio Text Data in the RT display it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station The display will automatically switch to the PS data display if no PS data th
114. RECORDER Please select the type of editing Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high speed copying Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing For more information about these options see Editing accuracy on page 118 4 Highlight From then use the playback controls gt II lt lt gt gt etc LCD page 7 to find the start of the section to erase then press ENTER The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current play position in the title After pressing ENTER a marker shows the start of the section Erase Section HDD E 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 SP Rec time 2h00m SE 10 1 00 00 09 15 I Play Pause 5 Highlight To then in the same way find the end of the section to erase then press ENTER After pressing ENTER another marker indicates the end of the section with the section itself marked in red gt 6 3 Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look e When editing VR mode Original content you may not be able to erase very short sections less than five seconds Divide HDD DVD VR DVD RAM Pjay List only Use this command to divide a title into two Note that once divided the two new HDD titles cannot be recombined into one again 1 Highlight the titl
115. Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time or by title chapter track number 1 Select Search Mode from the Play Mode menu then choose a search option The available search options depend on the type of disc aA 1 CE Cl El EC 2 M LCD page 2 Enter a title chapter track number or a search time Play Mode Search Mode Time Search Input Time A B Repeat Title Search A Repeat Chapter Search Programme v Time Search HDD DVD For example for 25 minutes into the current title press 2 5 0 0 For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title press 1 1 5 2 0 Time Search Video CD For example for 2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current track press 2 3 0 Title Chapter Track Search For example for track 6 press 6 3 Start playback Depending on the disc normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached 2 For DivX files select Play Mode in the Disc Navigator while playback is stopped and in the Home Menu during playback respectively 3 When using time search playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input KD Cya SSS OS A B Repeat DVD HDD CD VideoCD DivX The A B Repeat function allows you to specify two points A and B within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over 1 During playback select A B Repeat from the Play Mode menu
116. The setting is indicated in the front panel display and shown on screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc If a recordable disc is loaded the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown Note that if the On Screen Display setting see On Screen Display on page 160 is Off then this information is not displayed Note Basic recording from the TV DVD VR DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM HDD Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the channel to record choosing whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality 1 LCD page 1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording e f you re recording to DVD load a recordable disc if you load a new blank DVD RW or DVD RW disc the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc e f you want to record a VR mode DVD R or a Video mode DVD RW you must initialize it before proceeding see nitializing recordable DVD discs on page 102 2 Lb LCD page 2 Press to switch between D TV digital and A TV analog CH 3 m Select a TV channel to record The front panel display shows the channel number or channel name if it s available A TV Channel md While the recorder is stopped you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel For channel 24 press 2 4 then ENTER orem 4 UOH LCD page 1 Set the picture quality recording time e See Setting the picture qu
117. VD HDD or HDDr Auto Replace Recording e Auto Replace Recording is only available as an option with regular daily or weekly recordings Note 9 Press to access the extended recording options Timing Recording Timing 10 Recording Genre None Timers set 1 32 VPS PDC 0 8 Press to display Quality Frequency and Destination Recording Schedule Tim Genre 25 May Friends Welcome to GUIDE Plus anne One Button Recording f you want to record to a particular HDD genre use the YELLOW Action button Genre to select one Use the GREEN Action button Timing to add extra time to the end of the recording 0 10 20 30 or VPS PDC V P e Press to display the standard recording options again amet Deleting a scheduled recording 1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording aut BBC2 25 May 1030 amp Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross aa mocks Rachel s choice of an over sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phoebe must choose between two unexpected BBC2 P02 10 30 60Min B Grid Search MyTV Recording Schedule Qual Freq Dest 25 May Friends LP Tue HDDr Welcome to GUIDE Plus aunt One Button Recording 77 RS ome 2 Press the RED Action button Delete The scheduled event is deleted 1 Fora DVD timer recording if Optimized Rec see Optimized Rec on page 157 is set to On and VPS PDC is o
118. Windows Media Player 11 1 Click Sync 2 Choose the artist album or song you would like to copy and press the right mouse button 3 Click Add to Sync list 4 Click Start Sync This begins the synchronization process When finished the message Synchronized to Device is displayed in Windows Media Player 11 Start Sync For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows Media Player 11 Progress Bar GF Connect PC m Copying 00001 Folders 000 error 73 000003 Files 000 error umm a ocancel the synchronization process while it is underway press ENTER on the remote control The Connect PC screen is closed e f synchronization fails make sure that the Pioneer HDD DVD Recorder device is selected at the synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 11 and try again 7 When you have finished copying files close Windows Media Player 11 on the PC 8 Close the import screen on this device f no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after copying the import screen is automatically closed Using the Jukebox am Note When using the sync function of Windows Media Player 11 music artist and album folders are created as follows Root music artist album 1 musicl mp3 music2 mp3 ubum 2 musicl wma artist ubum 1 musicl mp3 The above music folder is not displayed Up to 50 000 tracks can be included in one album The total numbe
119. With the recorder stopped press to display the Home Menu e Use the INPUT button LCD page 2 to switch between the built in TV tuner and the external input e Use the CH buttons LCD page 2 to change the channel of the built in TV tuner There are six presets available Tuner suitable for general TV broadcasts e VCR suitable for video cassettes DTV LDP suitable for digital broadcasts and Laserdiscs e Memory1 user preset 1 e Memory2 user preset 2 e Memory3 user preset 3 You can press DISP LCD page 3 to see the individual settings for the current preset Tuner VCR or DTV LDP Note Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets Memory 1 2 or 3 Select Detailed Settings Memory1 Detailed Settings A Motion H H Still PureCinma 3 D Y C Motion I 4 Still YNR Off H Max CNR Off m Max Detail Off H Max White AGC Off Prog Motion You can adjust the following settings Prog Motion Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive PureCinema This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive Usually set to Auto but try switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural e 3 D Y C Adjusts the brightness colour separation
120. Y subscriber and you no longer have an analog terrestrial antenna e Tune your external receiver to the appropriate Host Channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in standby overnight C f you use both an external receiver and this recorder as sources follow the instructions above for setting up without an external receiver Only if this is unsuccessful try the external receiver method About EPG download e EPG data can only be received when the recorder is in standby When not using the recorder therefore please switch it into standby If you re using an external receiver leave this on when EPG data is downloading Getting started If you cannot receive any of the Host Channels see the above table then you won t be able to use the GUIDE Plus system In this case do not set the postal code or set Country to Other in the GUIDE Plus setup screen When GUIDE Plus service starts in your area set the postal code again If digital broadcasts start in your area please set the EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to Digital EPG Even if you can t use the EPG functions where you live you can still set VIDEO Plus recordings and manual recordings see Setting a manual recording on page 81 The front panel display shows EPG when receiving data If you power on the recorder during an EPG download the download is cancelled EPG data may be received several times a day
121. alified service personnel If connected to an AC outlet the cut off plug can cause severe electrical shock Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 1a A En CAUTION The STANDBY ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power Therefore make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident To avoid fire hazard the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 2a A En This product is for general household purposes Any failure due to use for other than household purposes such as long term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period K041 En VENTILATION CAUTION When installing this unit make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation at least 10 cm at top 10 cm at rear and 10 cm at each side WARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to
122. ality of AM radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched off Also try changing the position and direction of the AM loop antenna Changing the noise cut mode If you find that the AM sound quality is bad even after trying the above you may be able to improve it using a different noise cut mode Just choose the one that sounds best 1 Press after tuning to an AM radio station ems o 2 Select Tuner Setup then press ENTER Em 3 Choose Noise Cut then press ENTER 4 Select a Noise cut mode 1 2 or 3 then press ENTER Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time 1 Tune to an FM or AM radio station Select mono or auto stereo reception FM or the Noise Cut mode AM as necessary These settings are saved along with the preset 2 Press SETUP eem 3 Select Tuner Setup then press ENTER 07 Listening to the radio gt Choose ST Memory then press ENTER B 4 i 5 Select the station preset you want then press ENTER Listening to station presets 1 Make sure the tuner function is selected 2 Select a station preset Alternatively use the number buttons to select a preset directly Using RDS Radio Data System RDS is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of information t
123. ality recording time above for detailed instructions 1 Audio is recorded in 16 bit Linear PCM format video is recorded at XP quality When recording a bilingual broadcast select which audio chan nel to record see Bilingual Recording on page 155 2 Applicable only to HDD recording If this setting is used when recording to DVD MN32 is used When copied to DVD XP recordings are always copied in real time 5 3 LCD page 3 If you re recording from the A TV tuner select the audio channel to record See Changing A TV audio channels on page 94 for more on this When recording in VR mode if a broadcast is bilingual both audio channels are recorded allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording 6 aD LCD page 3 If you re recording from the D TV tuner select the audio language to record You may also be able to set which subtitle language to record use the button LCD page 3 to select Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a digital broadcast 7 LCD page 1 Start recording If you want to set a recording end time press the REC button repeatedly The recording time increases in 30 minute increments up to a maximum of six hours The time the recording will end is shown on screen and in the
124. analog TV broadcasts If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now use one of the supplied RF antenna cables connect an antenna either an antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna to the ANTENNA DIGITAL IN connector Next connect the other supplied RF antenna cable to connect an antenna to the ANTENNA IN RF IN connector Lastly connect the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector Antenna wall outlet Antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna i ANTENNA IN RF IN ANTENNA DIGITAL IN e wu e f ANTENNA OUT To antenna input TV A Important e f there is only one antenna outlet on your wall use a divider e Do not connect a component that can receive analog signals to the ANTENNA DIGITAL OUT If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital services connect your antenna s output to the ANTENNA IN RF IN connector using one of the supplied RF antenna cables Next connect the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector Antenna wall outlet ANTENNA IN RF IN zi ANTENNA OUT To antenna input We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for better broadcast picture quality If however you want to use an indoor antenna use one with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V 30 mA and set Aeria Power to On in the Initial Setup menu see page 153 Easy connectio
125. ange the camera angle during DVD Video movie multi angle scene playback 9 Playback controls Press to start or resume playback BH Press to stop playback you can resume playback by pressing Pm il Press to pause playback press again to restart 1 441 lt lt II I Press to start reverse or forward scanning Press again to change the speed While paused press and hold to start slow motion playback Press repeatedly to change the playback speed While paused press to advance a single frame in either direction lt lt gt Press to skip to the previous or next title chapter track folder or to display the previous or next menu page 10 ZOOM Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image 11 DISP Press to display information 12 Number buttons Use to enter title chapter or track numbers etc ENTER Press to select an option or execute a command CLEAR Press to clear a numeric entry etc 13 PLAY MODE Press to change the Play Mode repeat play for example K Controls and displays Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control 2 Insert four AA LR6 alkaline batteries into the battery compartment following the indications 9 inside the compartment 3 Close the cover Oo Caution Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting Please obs
126. anguages for language options on page 162 Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language Also some discs override the Subtitle Language preference Auto Language One On this setting DVD Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will play using that language without subtitles Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with subtitles Off Select to play DVD Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language preferences For Auto Language to be effective the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language The Initial Setup menu m Setting Options Explanation DVD Menu Language w Subtitle Sets the language of DVD Video menus to the same as that set for the Language subtitle language English Sets the language of DVD Video menus to English available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD Video menus Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed See Selecting other languages for language options on page 162 Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language Subtitle Display One Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences Off Select to switch off subtitle display Assist Sub
127. aracters for Video mode recordings and DVD k RW discs 1 Highlight the title you want to name or rename 2 Select Edit gt Title Name from the command menu panel 2 Disc Navigator HDD 10Titles NET 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr E 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 4 Titles Set Thumbnail 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr Erase Section go A 20 00 Fri 3 12 pr Divide Recent first Chapter Edit a3 Ej Si 22 00 THU 2 12 Pi Lock 22 00 Thu 2 12 P All Genres Cancel Set Genre 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr P 44 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP DD uy Remain 1h00m 1 0G Ll 30h30m gt 3 Input a name for the selected title iQ Input Title Name 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 SP ABCDEFGHIJKLM NOPQRSTUVWXYZ small AARKKAASEERETITY pRO6600600000vb8 9 0123456789 4 amp x e v sxz l i Vi18702 42 9 2 9 mus or Clear e A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen Use the 4t buttons LCD page 1 to change the cursor position e Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower case or use the CASE SELECTION buttons 4 9 LCD page 7 Note You can also use the CLEAR button LCD page 2 to delete characters directly press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder you will see only a limited character set em gt 4
128. are more files folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded PC created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this recorder due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc In these particular instances check with the software publisher for more detailed information Discs recorded in packet write mode UDF format are not compatible with this recorder Check the DVD R RW or CD R RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information Dolby Digital b JpT T131 DIGITAL STEREO CREATOR Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Before you start DTS A dts Digital Out DIS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks of DTS Inc DVB The Digital Video Broadcasting Project or DVB for short is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting covering terrestrial cable and satellite broadcasts Based around the MPEG 2 coding system these open standards ensure that compliant systems are able to work together independent of manufacturer DVB is extremely flexible being able to deliver virtually any kind of digital content to the home including High Definition and Standard Definition TV broadband multimedia content and interactive services D3 DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project About the int
129. are not connected or are not connected properly Try lowering the volume If this problem is not fixed by removing and inserting the power cable this unit may be damaged In such an event please contact a Pioneer authorized service center or your nearest dealer Check whether the speaker cables are short circuited If the error message continues to be displayed contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing Additional information Specifications SX LX70SW Audio Multi channel Receiver Subwoofer e Amplifier section RMS Power Output 8 channel output Front Center Surround 6 channel 50 W per channel 1 kHz 1096 T H D 8 Q Dual Subwoofer 2 channel 100 W 60 W 50 W 100 Hz 1096 T H D 8 Q e FM tuner section Frequency FANE ce eee eee ees 87 5 MHz to 108 MHz PONS ait to ete Rhee ck CR ADR ee oe Oe 75 Q unbalanced e AM tuner section Frequency range sies erre 531 kHz to 1602 kHz qup PC Loop antenna e Subwoofer section GOS Gs cic tied we e eco ae Pr das Bass reflex floor type magnetically shielded SU Ne Ts heer na uo pace dur dud Oa AE 18 cm 1 way system Pe Shel M eas S 18 cm cone type x2 N minal IMMEDI SNCSs scr vs tua xXx ee aee ees ba nex 8 Q Fregusncy range MAP 30 Hz to 500 Hz Maximum Input Power 50W x2 e Input Output section HDMI terminal
130. art finalizing the disc During finalization e f the finalization process of a DVD RW or DVD R RW disc is going to take more than around four minutes you can press ENTER to cancel Around four minutes before completion the option to cancel disappears e You can t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD R disc How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize DVD R RW Video mode and DVD R RW discs can take up to 20 minutes Initializing recordable DVD discs DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD RAM DVD R RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording When you first load a blank DVD RW or DVD RW disc the recorder initializes it for recording automatically By default blank DVD RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording See DVD RW Auto nitialize below if you want to change the default to Video mode DVD R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of the box if you want to use a DVD R for VR mode recording you must initialize it before recording anything on the disc DVD RW and DVD RAM discs can also be initialized in order to erase the contents of the disc A Important e Initializing a DVD RW DVD RW or DVD RAM disc will erase everything recorded on it Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep You may not be
131. back Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the video playing CM SKIP commercial skip Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the video playing 16 Recording controls page 95 REC Press to start recording Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE Plus4 9 screen use for One Button Record STOP REC Press to stop recording 17 REC MODE page 95 Press repeatedly to change the recording mode picture quality 18 HELP Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen 19 TIMER REC page 75 98 Press to set a timer recording 20 TIMER ON OFF This button cannot be used for the supplied HDD DVD recorder 21 Number buttons Use the number buttons for track chapter title selection channel selection and so on CLEAR Press to clear an entry and start again 22 A TV D TV Press to switch between analog TV antenna input and digital TV antenna input The A TV and D TV indicators on the front panel show which is selected 23 TV DVD Press to switch between TV mode in which you get the picture and sound from the TV s tuner and DVD mode in which you get picture and sound from the system s tuner or an external input 24 INPUT page 100 Press to change the HDD DVD recorder input to use for recording 25 TEXT Press to display Teletext information in European countries except the UK orto s
132. back of the title you selected starts GQ Disc Navigator HDD E Jamie T 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr4 S E 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 S 4 Titles Erase i 20 00 FRI 3 12 prg g Edit 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr9 S Recent first S All Genres Genre Name Multi Mode 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr P 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP 1h00m 1 08 Erase DVD Video DVD VR DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM HDD Use this function to erase unwanted titles When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles from a VR mode DVD RW the available recording space increases accordingly Erasing a title from a DVD RW Video mode or DVD RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc Erasing Play List titles or titles from a DVD R VR mode or Video mode or DVD R will not result in any more free space on the disc 1 Highlight the title you want to erase O 2 panel A 3 Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel tip You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR LCD page 2 when the title is highlighted Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER Select Erase from the command menu 1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD R RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers Title Name DVD Video DVD VR DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM HDD You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode DVD RAM and HDD recordings and up to 40 ch
133. been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable 3 Lights during recording blinks when recording is paused Controls and displays NTSC Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC a page 155 Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded VPS PDC page 98 Lights when receiving a VPS PDC broadcast during a VPS PDC enabled timer recording 5 Recording quality indicators page 95 XP Lights when the recording mode is set to XP high quality SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP standard play LP SLP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP long play or SLP super long play EP SEP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP extended play or SEP super extended play MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN manual recording level mode 6 Character display 7 R RW Lights when a recordable DVD R or DVD RW disc is loaded 8 PL page 118 Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded Common Interface To receive scrambled D TV channels you will need a CA module and smart card provided by your service provider Different CA modules support different encryption systems This recorder is designed to work with modules that support the DVB standard Contact your service provider to obtain the right kind of CA module Note that neither CA modules nor smart card
134. ble to run Windows Media Player 11 Even if your PC can run Windows Media Player 11 we cannot guarantee that it will function properly with this device For more details see the Help section of Windows Media Player 11 Plugging in After checking all the connections plug in the recorder e Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet 03 Getting started Chapter 3 Getting started A important To control the HDD DVD recorder change the HDD DVD recorder s input function and put the remote control in HDD DVR mode When the remote control is in HDD DVR mode the HDD DVR screen is shown on the LCD he HDD DVR settings are listed on three separate pages To cycle between pages use the PAGE button Switching on and setting up When you switch the recorder on for the first time you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature This takes you through setting the Clock the internal TV tuner and the video output If you re using the recorder for the first time we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder SOURCE 2 Switch on the recorder When you switch on for the first time your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen If the Setup Navigator doesn t appear you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu see page 152 e fth
135. c the recorder automatically initializes it e Incompatible region number The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play e Cannot record any more titles The disc control data limit has been reached or the maximum e No more space for file management data number of chapters and or titles has been reached Erase titles chapters or combine chapters e This disc cannot be recorded Undo the The disc was finalized on a non Pioneer DVD recorder Undo the finalization finalization in order to recording editing e Cannot play this disc The disc may be dirty or damaged Take out the disc clean it and e This disc cannot be recorded retry If the error persists use a new disc If the error appears even e Cannot read the CPRM information with a new disc please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service Could not record the information to the disc center or your dealer to carry out repairs e Cannot edit Could not initialize disc e Could not complete finalization successfully e Could not undo finalization successfully e Could not successfully unlock the disc e Incompatible or unreadable disc The disc loaded is a playback only disc type This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged e Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM The video source is copy once protected Use a VR mode DVD R RW compatible disc with CPRM for recording e Cannot record this content usin
136. can also start copying by starting playback of the CD DVD and then pressing O T COPY LCD page 3 To cancel copying press ENTER If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and WMA MP3 files the part currently selected will copy 1 Up to 50 000 tracks can be created in the Jukebox You can create up to 50 000 artists albums in total e Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously such as a live recording there will be a brief pause in sound between tracks Audio CDs are classified according to the information in the Gracenote database e WMA MP3 files are classified according to the information included in the files Track names may differ from the names of the original files Depending on the name of the original folder and track the artist and album under which the folder or track is classified may differ Using the Jukebox am Connect PC Copying files via USB Using a USB connection you can copy WMA and MP3 files from a PC to the HDD of this device Operations carried out on the PC require Windows Media Player 11 Connecting a regular USB device You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB device such as a USB drive to the HDD A Important 1 Connect the USB device e f the PC you are using does not currently have Windows Media Player 11 installed you must first install the pr
137. circuit this system extracts surround sound from sources as follows e Dolby Pro Logic 4 1 channel sound mono surround from any stereo source Dolby Pro Logic Il 5 1 channel sound stereo surround from any stereo source With two channel sources the 7 subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is the next generation audio technology for all high definition programming and media It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high definition era Built on Dolby Digital the multi channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts worldwide Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next generation A V receivers but remains fully compatible with all current A V receivers Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi channel audio programs of up to 7 1 channels and supports multiple programs in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1 7 Mbps on Blu ray Disc and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems Dolby Dig
138. corder is in standby Power Save must be set to Off see Power Save on page 152 Connecting an external decoder box 1 If you have an external dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system use the setup described on this page See above for how to connect the G LINK cable A Important Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder e Information from the decoder for example relating to pay TV services is only viewable when this recorder is off in standby Fortimer recording to work properly on this recorder the VCR satellite receiver cable box must also be switched on during recording e t is not possible to watch one TV programme and record another using this setup SCART AV connection To antenna input E Decoder Antenna cable TV wall outlet VCR Satellite receiver Cable box To SCART AV connector TV 1 Connect the cable from the antenna cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR satellite receiver cable box 2 Usea SCART cable not supplied to connect your decoder to your VCR satellite receiver cable box See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed instructions 3 Usea SCART cable to connect your VCR satellite receiver cable box to the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER AV connector on this recorder 4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1 RGB TV AV connect
139. ct by code number Press amp then use the number buttons to enter the four digit language code See Language code list on page 17 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes Using Software Update Digital tuner The Software Update function can keep the built in digital tuner up to date with the latest system software You can either check for updates manually or have the recorder do it automatically at regular intervals Access the Software Update screen from the Options menu There are three options available Manual Update Auto Update and Technical Information Manual Update Select Manual Update to check for updated software immediately If new software is found then it is automatically downloaded and installed The new software will take effect the next time the recorder is powered on If for some reason the new software could not be downloaded successfully a dialog box informs you of the error Press HOME MENU to exit or RETURN to return to the previous screen Note that channel information may be erased when software update is used and that timer recording will not work during the update To cancel manual update before it has completed press HOME MENU Auto Update By default the Auto Update option is On which means that periodically the recorder will check for and update the digital tuner software if it s available We recommend that you leave this option On If new software is
140. d The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions including e Turning the power off and on again e Pressing the HDD DVD button LCD page 7 and choosing the HDD e When a timer recording begins e When you try and make any changes to system settings Gracenote Database Database Update Updates the Gracenote database installed in this unit Load the Update Disc created with the latest data downloaded from the Pioneer website For details visit the Pioneer website http www pioneer eu Version Shows the current version of the Gracenote database installed in this unit Information The Initial Setup menu m Additional information about the TV system settings About the input line system This recorder is compatible with PAL SECAM 3 58 NTSC and PAL 60 TV systems The Input Line System and Input Colour System settings determine how the recorder treats incoming video signals from an external input Please note the following points when changing the input line system e f when the Input Line System setting is changed the screen goes blank due to incompatibility with your TV you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel W Stop button then pressing gt Play also front panel while the recorder is stopped e When you switch the Input Line System setting the Copy List is erased If you switch the setting using the E Stop button and gt Play buttons as described above th
141. d a keyword 3 Enter a keyword to appear in the menu aunt BBC2 25 May 1010 Back Keyboard Please press w or 4 to highlight a character on the keyboard Select with ENTER Press the Green button to exit Please enter your personal search keyword Welcome to GUIDE Plus aunt One Button Recording isis sales avet When you re finished press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue 4 Start the keyword search You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and GREEN Action buttons When you have set more than two keywords an All subcategory automatically appears which allows you to search for all your keywords 04 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide My TV Area The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile You can define a profile by channels themes and or keywords As soon as a personal profile has been set the GUIDE Plus system continuously scans the TV listings for the next seven days Whenever you access the My TV Area a list of programmes matching your profile appears From the My TV Area you can e Set up a profile by channel theme and or keyword e Edit and delete profiles e Read programme synopses e Tune to a programme that s currently showing e Set a programme to record Access Information panels Setting up a profile You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16 channels four categories and 16 keywor
142. d on a DVD disc Chaybak o Playing in slow motion DVD HDD VideoCD SuperVCD DivX You can play video at various slow motion speeds DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction while Video CDs Super VCDs and DivX titles can only be played forwards in slow motion There is no sound when playing in slow motion 1 n LCD page 1 Pause playback E IM I gt 7 2 Ld Press and hold to start slow motion reverse or forward play 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed The current playback speed is indicated on screen 4 gt Resume normal playback Frame advance frame reverse DVD HDD VideoCD SuperVCD DivX You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the HDD frame by frame With Video CDs Super VCDs and DivX titles you can only use frame advance 1 o LCD page 1 Pause playback 4I gt 2 Back up or advance one frame with each press 3 gt Resume normal playback The Play Mode menu ALL The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions repeat and programme play functions Note Select Play Mode from the Home Menu Cg Play Mode Search Mode Time Search A B Repeat Title Search Repeat Chapter Search Programme e Select Play Mode from the command menu for Audio CDs WMA MP3 files or DivX files by pressing in the Disc Navigator Search Mode DVD HDD VideoCD SuperVCD DivX The
143. d recording quality in real time Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original the copy will not be better quality than the original If you select MN above you can also change the level setting MN1 to MN32 LPCM or XP from the Recording Quality box that appears ter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals according to the Auto Chapter setting see also Auto Chapter Video on page 157 and Auto Chapter DVD R RW on page 158 3 When copying to a DVD R RW MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available 4 XP mode available only when copying to HDD EN Copying and backup Optimized The recording quality is automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space available on the disc Copying is carried out in real time When you change the recording mode setting you can see how much disc space it will require If this is more than is available it shows up in red and you won t be able to start copying In this case either change the recording quality or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List Select the title containing the audio you want to change 2 Select Bilingual from the command menu panel 3 Select a bilingual audio option kA Note Using disc backup See also Copyright on page 127 This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of finalized
144. d to excessive cigarette smoke X Place directly on top of an amplifier or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use X Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference especially if the television uses an indoor antenna X Usein a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam X Useonathick rug or carpet or cover with cloth this may prevent proper cooling of the unit X Placeon an unstable surface or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unit s feet Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder first remove the disc if loaded and close the disc tray Next press O STANDBY ON to switch the power to standby checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off Wait at least two minutes Lastly disconnect the power cord Never lift or move the recorder during playback or recording discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged Resetting the recorder If you need to you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings 1 Make sure that the recorder is on 2 Using the front panel controls press and hold E Stop and press STANDBY ON The recorder turns off with all settings reset ED Additional information Specifications SDVR LX70D General Power requirements 220 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz POWSr CONSUMPUOM a usua ir ox d Roh e eR deed 58 W Power cons
145. de a surround sound effect to a wider area than Focus 5 1ch mode Extra Power Outputs stereo sound in the case of multi channel sources down mixed stereo sound from the surround speakers for powerful stereo effect Listening in stereo You can listen to any source stereo or multichannel in stereo When playing a multichannel source all channels are downmixed to the front left right speakers and the subwoofer sure Press repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display P Note 1 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams Dolby TrueHD over 88 2 kHz DTS HD over 88 2 kHz or with the channel format of 2 0 DTS Express with the channel format of 2 0 2 This function is available only for a Pioneer HDMI Control compatible H Genre Sync Mode Only when you have this unit connected to the supplied HDD DVD recorder and are using the HDMI Control function you can make use of the Genre Sync Mode to have the listening mode automatically change to that which best matches the genre of the contents playing from the recorder e Set the HDMI Mode to AMP Mode page 43 e Press when listening to media contents from a recorder The most appropriate listening mode is selected and shown in the display When the related genre could not be determined No Genre or Can t use may be displayed and the listening mode remains unchanged amp rip e Mainly used with Jukebox and
146. ded letting you experience D TV interactively The channel banner displays an icon to indicate that the MHEG application can be run LCD page 2 Press to start the MHEG application e You can also use any of the colour buttons e Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application Viewing Teletext European countries except the UK You can view the Teletext that comes simultaneously with certain programmes e LCD page 2 Press to display the Teletext You can also use any of the colour buttons Press the TEXT button again to hide the Teletext screen Changing A TV audio channels You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal e 3 LCD page 3 Press to change the audio type The current audio channel is displayed on screen Note 1 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running the MH If the NICAM audio setting see N CAM Select on page 155 is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast you can switch between NICAM and Regular non NICAM audio uia If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual you can also select the language C gt NICAM B Regular lt NICAM usa e You can also select the language for a non NICAM bilingual broadcast Tom A B L R _ When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected see External Audio on page 155 you can switch the audio channel between left L right R or
147. dot hh cp ede eek Hace thee da G out Gin uta ddos heed wee bctens Hee ad Audio 1 L out Audio 1 L out Cauda ed Kea eae eee ee Audio 1 L in P RorCout RorCin eee ee GND lt pc GND H B out Bin TU sd s Cabo he eee bas Video out or Y out Video out 2O edeha datas e eae ek AS Video in or Y in Oera nud Stdbtapeurs quid head Geek dede were ach dos Status TX GND Note The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice due to improvement ED Additional information e 0 am gracenote Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote9 Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information please visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright O 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote
148. ds 1 Select My TV from the Menu bar 2 Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile In Profile you can enter Keywords of your choice and combine them with your favorite Channels and Themes Press the Wi Yellow button to add the Red button to delete and the Green button to edit My Preferences Channels Welcome to IE GUIDE Plus Cain Categories One Button AGGIE Keywords Camp Press ENTER to activate your Profile Channels is now highlighted 3 To add a channel to your profile press the YELLOW Action button H Please select a channel and press ENTER to confirm BBC1 P 01 Select your Channel Welcome to GUIDE Plus Canet One Button Recording avn Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and press ENTER Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels 4 To add a category to your profile highlight Categories and press the YELLOW Action button Press ENTER to search Sport gt All programmes w 4 for other Sport categories Press for Movies categories Press for Children categories Select your theme Welcome to GUIDE Plus Canet One Button Recording aun Select a category from the Search Area categories and press ENTER Repeat this step to add up to four categories 5 To add a keyword to your profile highlight Keywords and press the YELLOW Action button 5 am Please press gt or 4 to highlight a character on gt t
149. e DV Input setting see DV nput on source component pauses playback or plays an page 155 between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 unrecorded section of tape or if the power fails in the source component or the DV cable is disconnected V Frequently Asked Questions e can t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder Check that the DV cable is properly connected Also make sure that what you re trying to record is not copy protected The DV IN jack is an input only There is no output functionality P Note 1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly the audio type will not switch automatically You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting page 155 Chapter 9 Editing Editing options The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types extonerg o OUSE sap DVD R RW Original Play List Create page 119 o Play page 119 o eo e e Erase page 119 o e Edit Title Name page 120 e e e Edit gt Set Thumbnail page 121 Edit gt Erase Section page 121 e e Edit gt Divide page 122 o o Edit Chapter Edit page 122 Q e Edit Set Genre page 123 Edit gt Lock page 124 e amp e Edit Move page 124 Edit gt Combine page 125 e Genre Name page 125 oO Multi Mode page 126 o Undo page 126 o e e 7 1 DVD R RW only The Disc Navigator screen The Disc Navigator screen is wh
150. e a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R disc a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc All the title menus are navigated in the usual way pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu then using the f 4 9 followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback Finalizing a disc DVD VR DVD Video DVD R DVD RW Finalizing fixes the recordings on the disc so that it can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD ROM drive Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it can t be changed afterwards If you wantto rename the disc see nput Disc Name on page 147 before starting the steps below DVD RW discs don t generally need finalizing However if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc then you will need to finalize When using a DVD RW you can still record and edit even after finalizing although the title menu will disappear if you do so Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu A Important e Once you ve finalized a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R disc you can t edit or record anything else on that disc However the finalization on a DVD RW disc maybe undone see Undo Finalize on page 148 for how to d
151. e device make sure of the following The connected device s video input is set correctly for this recorder he DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP compatible The connected device is compatible with NTSC 720 x 480i p 1280 x 720p 1920 x 1080i p and PAL 720 x 576i p 1280 x 720p 1920 x 1080i p video input e f the recorder s internal HDD is damaged or broken there will be no HDMI output Not all HDCP compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder No video from the HDMI If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any output picture at all In this case press amp OPEN CLOSE while holding down the W Stop button on the front panel to switch the setting There s no sound from the e There is no sound when using a DVI terminal connected HDMI or DVI e Some HDMI compatible devices do not output sound check with the manual that came device with the connected device The power automatically This recorder s power may be turned on each time you turn on the power for a connected turns on plasma television If you do not want this unit to be turned on in this way set this recorder s HDMI Control to Off page 159 Can t record video When using HDMI Control to record you must make sure that the channel information for the plasma television matches that of this recorder If the channel information does not match you cannot make recordings Use t
152. e eee A EE eee a 1 e Satellite Speakers SSP LX70ST box Speaker cables siccam iod rm PERI RUP ee pee Ghee eee 6 Speaker b ases 1 oa tots iod yeh a CER EUR Rl ee Ge ee ek dd 4 Bons DEUS saga wee ce ues e qoe rank ucs UE RR E 16 vv T m 4 Note e Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice due to improvements Section Two HDD DVD Recorder SDVR LX70D Contents 01 Before you start Symbols used in this HAI acta ee ts a ela we aae 57 Disc content format playback compatibility 57 About the internal hard disk drive 61 02 Recorder connections Connecting a TV antenak d d d cc deg OC Rte 62 Eds CONNECTIONS lt 2 ces a dcc hog One eee RAO 62 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver 63 Connecting an external decoder box 1 64 Connecting an external decoder box 2 65 Connecting Using ADOMI usus i r ci n os 65 Connecting a DV camcorder x scececurw ca its 66 Connecting a WOR eV a aua ix EORR at X 67 Plugging I qd arii drea a a a a REOR 67 03 Getting started Switching on and setting UD suce IC ce eee 68 For users receiving digital broadcast services 70 Setting up the GUIDE Plus system 71 04 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide The GUIDE Plus System iocescesceieseeseseci 74 Using the GUIDE Pils SySieM 2020 riae 74 CIS 64 45 ee RP RD d acra rw ran x de e oes 76 GUIDE Plus F
153. e frequency is displayed n the PTY display No Data or No Type may be shown In this case the PS display is shown after a few seconds 3 RDS is only possible in the FM band Surround sound settings Cm Chapter 8 Surround sound settings A Important Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen as shown below RECEIVER F S SURR Using the Sound Setup menu From the Sound Setup menu you can access all the surround sound settings of the system During setup the speakers are represented by the following letters e L Front left speaker e C Center speaker R Front right speaker SR Surround right speaker SL Surround left speaker SW Subwoofer Channel level setting The Auto MCACC feature see page 30 should give you the best surround sound setup However you may find that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can improve the surround sound in your listening room This method of setting the channel levels allows you to listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback channel A further method of setting the channel levels is to use the test tone method See Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone on page 39 for more on this Note 1 Press SETUP gt 2 Select Sound Setup then press ENTER gt 3 Select ChannelLev
154. e or smart card obtained from your service provider is Conditional Access Programme required to watch the selected programme Insert the supplied module or card into the Common Interface card slot on the front of the recorder page 17 e There is no DV input or the input signal is No signal was detected at the DV IN jack This may appear if a blank unrecordable section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder e No DV camcorder connected The camcorder is not connected properly or the camcorder is switched off e You cannot connect more than one DV This recorder s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder camcorder at a time e Cannot operate the DV camcorder This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back on again Could not operate the DV camcorder This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder e The DV camcorder is not set for playback The camcorder is in camera mode Switch it to playback mode Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder e The printer is not ready or is not connected This message is displayed when communication could not be Please check the printer established with the printer See the Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause e Printing has been cancelled because This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing After checking the printer for the cause of the error either recon
155. e other player must be specifically RW compatible in order to play it page 57 Discs recorded with copy once material cannot be played on non CPRM compatible players page 92 e DVD RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other players Finalize the disc and try again During playback the When a copy protected disc is played via a VCR the picture will not display correctly picture is dark or distorted Connect the recorder directly to your TV Recorded contents are not Change the recording mode to XP SP clear or artefacts appear in areas of flat colour due to MPEG compression also known as b ock noise Can t record or does not Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD HDD record successfully For a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R check that the disc isn t already finalized Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc HDD 998 titles VR mode 99 titles 999 chapters per disc Video mode disc 99 titles per disc 99 chapters per title DVD R RW 49 titles per disc 99 chapters per title max 254 chapters per disc Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected For a VR formatted disc check that the disc isn t locked page 147 Check that you are recording with the same TV system PAL NTSC etc as the disc has already been recorded in All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system When
156. e sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it suse Press to select an option Choose between the following options Sleep On Switches off after about an hour e Sleep Off Cancels the sleep timer Note 1 The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set regard 2 The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set The H D After selecting Sleep On you can press SLEEP again to check how much time is left Each line indicates approximately 12 minutes remaining Sleep Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table on the following page 1 Set the input to TV 2 Press and hold the TV button and press SETUP The TV preset screen is shown on the remote control and the current maker code is displayed on the LCD screen TV PRESET Maker code Number buttons 3 Usethe number buttons to input the maker code for your TV and press ENTER See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes If there is more than one code given for your make input the first one in the list e f the maker s name of your TV doesn t appear in the table you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV 4 Point the remote
157. e the 4 gt buttons to see information about other channels If there is still more information to be displayed More is displayed press the BLUE button to see the extra information e To hide the channel banner press RETURN 1 If you select a locked channel you will need to enter your password to access it While listening to D TV radio channels the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes 2 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99 digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999 3 f you select a locked channel you will need to enter your password to access it While listening to D TV radio channels the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes ot all channels supply more detailed information 4 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error 5 NE eeu OOS O Changing D TV audio languages a LCD page 3 Press to display the current audio language Press repeatedly to change it to other available languages Changing D TV subtitle languages LCD page 3 Press to display the current subtitle language Press repeatedly to change it to other available languages Using the MHEG application UK only Some stations bring you programmes with the MHEG Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group application enco
158. e title Auto Chapter On e When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD chapter marks are HDD VR added at the black screen between commercials and main programming When recording in DV chapter marks can be changed by date time Off Automatic chapter marking is switched off Auto Chapter Video No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off 10 minutes e When recording in Video mode chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes This settings applies to recording or real time copying to Video mode DVD R RW discs The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Auto Chapter No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off ee 10 minutes e When recording in DVD R RW chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes This settings applies to recording or real time copying to DVD R RW discs HDD Recording Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode Use this setting if you Format don t need to transfer the recording later to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW Video Mode One Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW as high speed copy can be used When Video Mode On is used you must select the audio channel you want to record
159. e you want to divide gt 2 Select Edit gt Divide from the command menu panel 3 HDD only Select the type of edit HDD DVD RECORDER e Please select the type of editing Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high speed copying Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing For more information about these options see Editing accuracy on page 118 4 Use the playback controls gt Il lt lt gt gt etc LCD page 7 to find the place you want to divide the title Gd Divide Title HDD 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 SP Rec time 2h00m 10 1 00 00 09 15 Play Pause Divide SS Sy eer pre 7 e Cancel 5 Press to divide the title at the current playback position gt 6 Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel Divided titles cannot be combined OK Chapter Edit DVD VR DVD RAM HDD When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title with commands for erasing combining and dividing 1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you want to edit gt 2 Select Edit gt Chapter Edit from the command menu panel j 3 HDD only Select the type of edit 1 HDD DVD RECORDER e Please select the type of editing Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high speed copying
160. ear an entry and start again 5 DISP Use to display RDS information page 36 6 TUNE Use to find radio frequencies 7 ST Use to select a station preset Controls and displays Operating the supplied HDD DVD Recorder 1 SOURCE Switches the power for the HDD DVD recorder to On Standby 2 PAGE lt gt Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present 3 TOP MENU page 104 DISC NAVIGATOR page 106 118 Press to display the top menu if a DVD Video or finalized DVD R RW Video disc is loaded or the Disc Navigator screen LCD touch screen HDD DVR 1 3 HDD JUKE P LIVE HDD DVR 2 3 4 MENU page 104 Press to display the disc menu if a DVD Video finalized DVD R RW Video mode or finalized DVD R RW disc is loaded When in the GUIDE Plus4 9 system use to jump directly to the Menu bar 5 1 4 cursor buttons and ENTER Use to navigate all on screen displays Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option While watching D TV press ENTER to display the Channel List screen 6 HOME MENU Press to display the Home Menu from which you can navigate many functions of the system 7 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on screen menu or display Also press to exit the MHEG application 8 GUIDE Plus Action buttons Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a data channel of a digital broadcast The functio
161. ecent first ET 2h00m 1 0G i gt To 22 00 THU 2 12 Pt 7 SP M 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr 7 SP All Genres 1h00m 1 0G Remain 30h30m You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu 3 Browse the list of titles Use the I 1 buttons LCD page 7 to display the previous next page of titles ochange the thumbnail picture displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 121 For HDD recordings you should be able to see a thumbnail title digest If it doesn t display set Set Preview to Normal See Set Preview on page 160 4 Play the highlighted title You can also select Play from the command menu options Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in various different ways sorted alphabetically by recording date by genre and so on You can also choose whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the same time 1 Display the view options panel The view options panel d Disc lavigator HDD 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr 4 SP 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 SP 2h00m 1 0G 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr 9 SP 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr9 SP 2h00m 1 0G A 22 00 THU 2 12 Pr7 SP a 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr7 SP gt 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr2 SP a 1h00m 1 06 P 10Titles 4 Titles Sort order s Recent first Genre All Genres 1h00m 1 0G 119 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP 30h30m 2 Choose S
162. ecorder Connect the component directly to your TV The picture is distorted Change the Input Line System setting page 161 You can also change it by pressing the E Stop button and gt Play on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped END Additional information Problem Remedy Screen is stretched Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting page 158 is correct for the kind of TV you have vertically or horizontally see also page 173 e f you have a widescreen TV check its aspect ratio settings his recorder s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID 1 widescreen signalling set the connected component to output 4 3 aspect ratio standard video Audio subtitle language Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a digital cannot be changed broadcast You can only use the audio track and subtitles for the language that were selected at the time of recording a digital broadcast The audio track and subtitles cannot be changed to other languages Can t play a disc recorded If the disc was recorded in DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R make sure that it s using this recorder on finalized page 101 another player e Some players will not play recordable DVD discs even when recorded in DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R and finalized e f the disc was recorded in VR mode th
163. ect the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your VCR amp tip his recorder has a through function which allows you to record a TV programme from the built in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR To use this feature when the recorder is in standby Power Save must be set to Off see Power Save on page 152 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built in decoder connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page If you are using a separate decoder box for your Cable satellite TV set up following the instructions on the next page Using the setup on this page you can Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver Change channels and set timer recordings on the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus system via the G LINK cable and after setting up A Important Do not connect this recorder to your TV through your VCR satellite receiver or other component Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier receiver When using the GUIDE Plus system to make a timer recording from an external receiver make sure that the external receiver is switched on Satellite dish antenna cable TV wall outlet To antenna input Cable Satellite receiver From SCART AV To rec
164. ection can only be made with DVI equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection HD CP If you choose to connect to a DVI connector you will need a separate adaptor DVI HDMI to do so A DVI connection however does not support audio signals Consult your local audio dealer for more information his unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface Version 1 3a Depending on the component you have connected using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers Also when using a component with HDMI version 1 0 it is not possible to output copy controlled DVD Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection This unit supports SACD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD and DTS HD Master Audio To take advantage of these formats however make sure that the component connected to this unit also supports the corresponding format Other connections 1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI IN 1 to 3 interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI output on your HDMI component Once this receiver subwoofer is properly connected to your HDMI component the HDMI indicator red lights up on the display unit when you watch HDMI contents 2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI interconnect on a HDMI compatible display e The arrow on the cable connector body should be facing right for correct a
165. ed During playback and recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu Except for the Setup Navigator menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity e Press HOME MENU and select Initial Setup In the table below the default option is marked with a s Setting Options Explanation Basic Clock Setting Auto Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically Manual e If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area you can set the time and date manually e fany digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set e The clock must be set in order to use timer recording Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or PAL 60 recording from an external input 625 System Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input Note that you cannot select an external input when AV2 L1 In is set to Decoder page 155 See also About the input line system on page 161 for more information on this setting Power Save Mode 1 Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna output when the recorder is in standby Mode 2 No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in standby Off e When the recorder is in standby all signals arriving at the SCART and antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs HELP
166. ed in the U S and other countries Listening to an external audio source To listen to audio from a connected external component on this unit choose its input function on the remote control Some Pioneer products can be controlled viathis remote 1 If the system isn t already on press RECEIVER to switch on Also make sure that the external source TV satellite receiver etc is switched on 2 Select an audio input source Input sources are cycled through as shown below ce gt Digital2 gt Analog Front Audio In 4 amp iPod The LCD screen changes to that of the selected input source 3 Press the button for the appropriate connected component When a connected component is not displayed on the screen or when you have connected a component not manufactured by Pioneer press RCV button to put the remote control on the receiver subwoofer operation screen 4 If necessary start playback of the external source END Other connections Connecting external antennas For an external AM antenna use 5 to 6 meters of vinyl insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors Leave the loop antenna connected For an external FM antenna use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna external FM antenna Receiver subwoofer Side panel AM Loop antenna external AM antenna PAL connector Indoor anten
167. eed copied Note 1 Depending on the disc the copy speed may be reduced for example although a 6x disc is used the copy may be made at 2x speed ED Additional information Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode as well as the standard recording mode equivalents For recording time on the HDD see Specifications SDVR LX70D on page 176 Single Layer DVD DVD R RW DVD R RW DVD RAM Dual Layer VAT To ri TeTo 28 Olam 0 P P VR mode DVD R RW DVD RAM VR mode DVD R DL Video mode On HDD Video mode DVD R RW DVD R RW Video mode DVD R DL DVD R DL 1 3 4 9 84 3 84 4 4 p 4 9 yo sI oOo Nn OPO BR co N gt o NMNONMNNNN NM KN PY COo 40 01i A UMN O O 29 30 31 32 LPCM XP SEP SLP EP LP SP XP 802 mi 720 mi 600 mi 480 mi 420 mi 360 mi 300 mi 270 mi 240 mi 230 mi 220 mi 210 mi 200 mi 90 mi 80 mi 10 mi 60 mi 50 mi 40 mi 30 mi 20 mi 10 mi 05 mi 00 mi 95 mi 90 mi 85 mi 80 mi 15 mi 10 mi 65 mi 61 mi 61 mi soo mi ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins in
168. eeier TT III 9 Bdsic CONNECTIONS eee acacacararanirack VN E week eS 10 03 Controls and displays Display ULL eb wl pce ce ee een ee ee Gee oe DOR Rn d 14 BC X G 15 HDL DVD Recorder iade RCREACR es eae eee GE 16 Bec Vce sete entateeteeeadedeaaees ac en eea 16 Common Meelis aw ea o cox CXCRC a ge 17 li serung s cA ThOOUIE 4s 4 3 x arredi Ew 17 Hanote COMMOl ee dox ok o b CROCO RO ERO ACA 18 Operating the receiver subwoofer 18 Operating the built in FM AM tuner 19 LOD touch scree os ur ear OE wan PEN roii 19 Operating the supplied HDD DVD Recorder 20 Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and IVs 22 Operating a Pioneer Blu ray Disc player 24 Operating a Pioneer DVD player 25 Putting the batteries in the remote control 26 Using the remote control qsicacucacar arare anc os 26 04 Before you start SWItOAINO ON MEER 27 SEMINO IDs acd 3A RF US E Ro ud abd bai p d dk 27 Basi peration MT C 28 Operating the remote control LL 28 Using the LOD ioucl Sereeb ia anc RR RR Rr d 28 Watching a DVD ie add aei gies eae are ea ae ene 28 Listening toa Dok ti dodo oodd ee eee ee ode a8 x 29 Watching a title recorded on the HDD 29 Listening to INE radi ous ticos ic dd RO RR eee ke ROCA 29 05 Getting started Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal Gur tou SOUNA lt i a 6 CR CNRC Ide ande dog dac 30 06 Listening to your system Effective Sound f
169. eing played back Cancel Cancels repeat playback Playing your favourite music Play List You can collect and play back only your favourite songs stored on the HDD Creating a play list Select a track you want to add to a play Display the command menu Select Add to Play List from the menu Select a play list Play List 1 to Play List 4 where you want to add the selected track You can add up to 25 songs to a play list You can rename a play list see Editing the HDD Jukebox on page 139 Playing a play list SV Display the view options panel The view options panel 10 Artists m Display Mode e Artist Play List Original Artist HDD Total 10 Select Play List Select a play list Play List 1 to Play List 4 you want to play back Display the command menu Select Play from the menu Using the Jukebox Changing the display style of the Jukebox t ore 1 Select an artist album you want to change the display for 2 Display the view options panel amp Jukebox HDD Artist List Display Mode e Artist 10 Artists t Play List AY Original Artist HDD Total 10 3 Select a view option Display Mode By artist Displays the artists copied onto this unit from the earliest date By album Displays the albums of the selected artist When you select All albums of all artist are d
170. el then press ENTER 4 Use the buttons to select a channel or the f buttons to adjust the level of that channel e You can adjust the level of each channel by 10 dB 5 Press once when you re finished f you use the Auto MCACC feature again it will overwrite the settings you have made here Speaker distance setting The Auto MCACC feature see page 30 should give you the best surround sound setup However you may find that by further adjustment of the speaker distance settings you can improve the surround sound in your listening room Set the distance of each speaker from your normal listening position e eren 9 1 Open the Sound Setup menu 3 Use the buttons to select a speaker or the f buttons to adjust the distance Each speaker can be adjusted from 0 1 m to 9 0 m gt Select Distance then press ENTER 4 Press ENTER when you re finished f you use the Auto MCACC feature again it will overwrite the settings you have made here 1 When this function is set while MCACC Effect is on the value for the same function adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature is overwritten When MCACC Effect is off the value set here is applied regardless of the value adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature The Auto MCACC setting is not overwritten 2 The range of adjustment is limited when the volume level is set over 51 ET Surround sound settings Dynamic Range Contr
171. el level setting on page 37 3 Press to exit test tone setup once you have finished f you use the Auto MCACC feature again it will overwrite the settings you have made here Depending on the input signal and the listening mode the Virtual Surround Back mode may not be effective END Other connections Chapter 9 Other connections A Important When making or changing connections on the side panel of this unit be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket After completing all connections connect the power cord to the wall socket Connecting auxiliary components You can connect both analog and digital external audio sources to this system Digital audio sources include digital satellite receivers CD recorders etc We recommend using an HDMI cable to connect sources that have HDMI terminals For more information see Connecting using HDMI on page 42 To listen to audio from a TV connect the TV s audio cable to one of the inputs on this unit Connecting for digital audio This system has optical type digital inputs Use these to connect external components such as your MD or CD recorder Receiver subwoofer Side panel En INE NA OPTICAL From digital audio output optical e iao O i i ccc MD CD Recorder etc e Connect the OPTICAL IN 2
172. enna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna 3 To ensure optimum reception make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit 02 Connecting up Antenna wall outlet or Antenna wall outlet indooranteria RF antenna cable RF antenna cable om H a H ANTENNA ANTENNA IN DIGITAL IN L mM HDMIOUT conu 2a G LINK CONTROL ANTENNA DIGITAL J ES IN 5V m 30mA e amp FP jj SZ HDD DVD Recorder Receiver subwoofer Rear panel Side panel From digital audio output optical From Audio output To HDMI input H OF RF antenna cable To Antenna in Connecting up Oo Caution 5 These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system Do not connect the supplied speakers to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system Connection to any other amplifier may result in malfunction or fire After connecting the plugs pull lightly on the cables to make sure that the ends of the cables are securely connected to the terminals Poor connections can create noise and interruptions in the sound If the cables wires happen to be
173. ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating To prevent fire hazard the openings should never be blocked or covered with items such as newspapers table cloths curtains or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed D3 4 2 1 7b A En POWER CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock Do not place the unit a piece of furniture etc on the power cord or pinch the cord Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock Check the power cord once in a while When you find it damaged ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement soo2 En If you want to dispose this product do not mix it with general household waste There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment recovery and recycling Private households in the member states of the EU in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer if you purchase a similar new one For countries not mentioned above please contact your
174. ent to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warranties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRIN
175. equency Channel VHF low 49 MHz to 65 MHz FB FC1 FC 49 MHz to 94 MHz R1 to R5 VHF high 104MHzto300MHz FitoF6 104MHzto300MHz R6to R12 BtoQ S1 to S20 STEREO B G A2 NICAM Hyper 300 MHz to 470 MHz 21 to S41 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 L NICAM UHF 470 MHz to 862 MHz 21 to 69 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 B G NICAM Tuner digital Receiving SySteM raana DVB T 2 K 8 K COFDM Tuner VHEUHF s VHF band IIl 174 MHz to 230 MHz UHF band IV V 470 MHz to 862 MHz Auto Channel Preset ssssss 999 ch Auto Preset Auto Label Auto Sort AUO P ee ee Stereo MPEG layer I II Audio Decoder TP sampling frequencies 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz This product s digital tuner has been confirmed for use in the following countries Belgium France Germany Italy Spain Denmark Finland Netherlands Sweden Switzerland UK Additional information m Input Output Antenna uei rs 15 Q IEC 169 2 connector for VHF UHF in out analog ERU m E dub MINE 15 Q IEC 169 2 connector for VHF UHF in out digital trademark of NEC Corporation une AV2 laputlevel snra 6h cod oe eed owe k ai 1 Vp p 75 Q JOCKS obi fam ree he ban ih date hate aed AV connector Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission Vid o OUTPUT 4 ara Ge otd ean bgt yea kes See een AV1 from Microsoft Corporation DIUtBUCIBVEl ces base aet eee CEDE 1 Vp p 75 Q i
176. er Using DV also known as i LINK or IEEE 1394 1995 you copying is complete can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV e You can t customize the background for DVD R RW cable for input of audio video data and control signals or DVD R RW disc finalization i LINK and the i LINK logo are trademarks No title names are assigned his recorder is only compatible with DV format e If you want to give the disc a name please do so DVC SD camcorders Digital satellite receivers and before you start the copy see nput Disc Name on Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible page 147 You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at e lfatimer recording is scheduled to start and in some a time to this recorder other instances the disc will not be finalized You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN jack It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN jack DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16 bit 48 kHz or twin stereo tracks of 12 bit 32 kHz This recorder can only record one stereo audio track bM T Set the DV Input setting as required see DV nput on If it still doesn t work try switching off the camcorder page 155 ETE EHEC On Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48 kHz not 44 1 kHz e here s a picture but no sound Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the Try switching th
177. er can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL SECAM 3 58 NTSC or PAL 60 but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly e Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D TV mode e See also About the input colour system on page 161 for more information on this setting AV1 Out Video e Sets the AV1 RGB TV SCART output to standard composite video compatible with all TVs S Video Sets the AV1 RGB TV SCART output to S Video Recommended if you are using a long SCART cable RGB Sets the AV1 RGB TV SCART output to RGB Good quality but check your TV for compatibility Note that on this setting signals from the built in tuner and from external input is not output when the recorder is in TV mode If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all In this case either switch off and reconnect using the supplied video cable or reset the recorder see Resetting the recorder on page 175 The Initial Setup menu m Setting Options Explanation AV2 L1 In Video e Sets the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER SCART input to standard composite video S Video Sets the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER SCART input to S Video RGB Sets the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER SCART input to RGB Decoder Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER SCART connector For scrambled channels make sure that the channel Decoder setti
178. er subwoofer and HDD DVD recorder but also other Pioneer products such as Blu ray disc players DVD players and plasma televisions To operate these components orient the remote control toward the display unit Operating the receiver subwoofer Press to display the RECEIVER screen The RECEIVER screen is shown on the remote control s LCD screen and the remote is switched to Receiver mode RECEIVER F S SURR Choosing and operating a source component HDMI 1 ED E EB Press to cycle through connected components The selected component changes and the LCD screen on the remote control changes to that of the appropriate component e Toselect input for Digital 1 Digital 2 Analog Front Audio In or iPod press the LINE button until the desired input function is shown on the display unit 2 Choose the input source you are using when you have selected HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 or LINE The LCD screen changes to that for the selected component and you can then operate the desired Es DVR BD DVD LAY component EN DVR BD DVD HDMI input LINE input e When the desired source cannot be found or when you have a component not manufactured by Pioneer connected press RCV to put the remote control into Receiver mode The input for this unit remains unchanged Note To temporarily control the receiver while listening to audio from a connected component on this unit press RCV The selected
179. erating mode 11 VOL Use to adjust the volume of the receiver Subwoofer 12 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound LCD touch screen RECEIVER TEST Lu 13 SURR Use to select a Surround mode page 31 ADV SURR Use to change the audio setting to Pioneer s original Advanced Surround mode page 32 F S SURR Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode page 33 14 GENRE Use to listen to audio in Genre Sync mode page 33 This button is displayed only when the RECEIVER screen is shown during HDD DVD recorder operation 15 SOUND RTRV Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio sources page 33 16 DIRECT Use to switch on off the Effective Sound mode page 33 17 MCACC Starts the Auto MCACC setup page 30 18 TEST TONE Use to output the test tone for speaker setup page 39 19 SOUND Press to access the sound menu from which you can adjust bass and treble etc 20 SLEEP Press to set the sleep timer page 47 21 EXIT Cancel settings and exit the RECEIVER screen Operating the built in FM AM tuner E Q 1 t 3 cursor buttons and ENTER Use to control FM AM tuner functions 2 SETUP Use to access the menu system or tuner settings 3 RETURN Use to cancel settings LCD touch screen 4 Number buttons Use to directly choose a preset radio station CLEAR Press to cl
180. ere is no confirmation so please use with care You can t mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc When you change this setting the Input Colour System setting also changes see below About NTSC on PAL TV Depending on the Input Line System setting and the NISC on PAL IV setting the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below Input Line System NTSC on PAL TV sisi 625 System Off PAL On PAL 525 System Off NTSC On PAL60 About the input colour system The available options of the Input Colour System setting depend on the Input Line System setting The table below shows the different options available Built in analog Input Line System External input tuner 625 System Auto Auto PAL PA SECAM SECAM 525 System n a Auto 3 58 NTSC PAL 60 The Initial Setup menu Selecting other languages for language options ES 1 Select Other from the language list This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language Audio Language and Subtitle Language gt 2 Select the language you want D Initial Setup E cns C ai Basic OSD DVD Menu Language Digital Tuner Audi Analogue Tuner Supa caine lt 4 English gt Video In Out Auto Number E E53 BIN A Audio In DVD Audio Out Subt Language Recording v e Select by language name Use the buttons to change the language e Sele
181. ere you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD R RW VR mode discs DVD R RW and DVD RAM as well as video content on the hard disk drive A Important Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 161 During recording if you display the Disc Navigator for the HDD some ofthe titles may appear with a A mark These titles were recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder During recording these titles cannot be played 1 LCD page 7 Select the HDD or DVD SC f 2 NAVIGATOR Display the Disc Navigator screen Playback will automatically stop when you do this he Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu View options panel Title list a Disc Navigator HDD 10Titles 10 gd 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr4 SP 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 SP Selected 4 Titles p 2h00m 1 0G title om 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr9 SP E 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr9 SP 2h00m 1 06 De 22 00 THU 2 12 Pr7 SP as 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr7 SP All Genres 1h00m 1 08 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr2 SP 7 e ay F 7 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP x p Available EN C 1h00m 1 0G f recording time Title thumbnail Title information Command menu panel Press to display the command menu
182. ernal hard disk drive The internal hard disk drive HDD is a fragile piece of equipment When used without the proper care or in the wrong conditions it is possible that recorded contents may be damaged or lost entirely in some cases making even normal playback or recording impossible Please understand that in the event of repair or replacement of the HDD or related components all your HDD recordings will be lost Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store recordings permanently We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect against accidental loss Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility forany direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from HDD failure Do not move the recorder while it is on this includes during EPG download when the display shows EPG e Install and use the recorder on a stable level surface Do not block the rear vent cooling fan Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder This can be a cause of HDD failure While the recorder is switched on including during EPG download when the display shows EPG
183. ers properly refer to Connecting up on page 8 Verify the audio output and HDMI settings of your external component when connecting an external component via an optical digital cable or HDMI cable Can t operate using the remote e Replace the batteries Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 26 control Operate within 7 m 30 of the remote sensor Using the remote control on page 26 Remove any obstacles or operate from another position Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light For operating the HDD DVD recorder make sure that the control cable and HDMI cable are connected page 13 For operating the other Pioneer component connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of this receiver subwoofer make sure that the control cable and either an HDMI or analog audio cable are connected page 42 Tuner Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio Connect the AM antenna refer to Connecting up on page 8 and adjust the direction and broadcasts position for best reception You may also connect an additional internal or external AM antenna refer to Connecting external antennas on page 42 Fully extend the FM wire antenna position for best reception and secure to a wall You may also connect an outdoor FM antenna see Connecting external antennas on page 42 Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away Auto tuning does not pick up The radio signal
184. erve the following Don t mix new and old batteries together Don t use different kinds of battery together although they may look similar different batteries may have different voltages Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment Remove batteries from equipment that isn t going to be used for a month or more When disposing of used batteries please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction s rules that apply in your country area A warnine Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place such as inside a car or near a heater This can cause batteries to leak overheat explode or catch fire It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit s remote sensor Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the display unit as
185. eset 1 e Memory2 user preset 2 Memory3 user preset 3 You can press DISP LCD page 3 to see the individual settings for the current preset TV PDP or Professional Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets Memory 1 2 or 3 2 Move the cursor down and select Detailed Settings Memory1 Detailed Settings The Video Adjust menu 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust ie Tip o see more of the picture as you adjust different L Memoryt settings press ENTER after selecting the setting you A want to adjust Prog Motion Motion H Hii 2 H Still PureCinma YNR Off HHAH Max BNR Off HH Max MNR Off HHH Max Sharpness Soft m Detail Soft EN wv You can adjust the following settings Prog Motion Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive Prog Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On e PureCinema his setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2 On or Off if the picture appears unnatural YNR Adjusts the amount of noise reduction NR applied to the Y brightness component e BNR Adjusts the amount of noise reduction NR applied to the block noise ar
186. ess the GREEN Action button Next Caut aun BBC2 25 May 10 10 Back Next Home Please enter the recording date and press the Green button 34 to confirm 05 Jun Grid Search MyTV Schedule Recording Schedule Qual Freq Dest 25 May Friends LP Tue HDDr 29 May Men in Black SP Once HDD Welcome to GUIDE Plus SP Once HDD Caunet One Button Recording aune 4 Inthe same way enter the recording start time followed by the GREEN Action button Next to confirm 5 Enter the recording end time in the same way followed by the GREEN Action button Next to confirm 04 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide 6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel number then press the GREEN Action button Next to confirm BAD 784 A000 G Passe saci fve smere and ihe programme samiai at press iha Green bution to contr D TV 001 Welcome to GUIDE Flus One Bution x al eee Alternatively you can press the YELLOW Action button Mosaic and use the f buttons to select a channel from the mosaic followed by ENTER The Info Area This area is reserved for additional information such as news weather reports stock quotes and so on and varies by region Note that this feature is not available in all countries regions The Editor Area The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage your channels Any changes you make here will
187. et a timer recording for a programme that is divided into multiple parts all parts of that programme are recorded automatically In the programme list the earliest part of the programme to be recorded has a red icon with successive parts indicated by a gray icon Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as divided programmes 6 In the programme list the earliest programme to be recorded has a red icon with successive programmes indicated by a gray icon e There is a limit to the number of programmes you can schedule to record with the Series Recording function Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as part of a series 05 Using the digital electronic programme guide Editing a timer programme You can change any of the settings in atimer programme before the recording is due to start Even if a programme is currently being recorded you can program a new end time or edit its extend time parameter 1 LCD page 1 Press to display the Timer Programme View screen You can also access the Timer Programme View screen from the Home Menu press HOME MENU select Timer Recording then Timer Recording This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set d Timer Programme Vie VPS PDC 0 8 TmrPgms 3 32 Manhattan Open Tennis OK SUN 25 3 18 00 19 00 Pr4 World Jour
188. etting is effective for the speaker output A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD DVD recorder see Audio DRC on page 156 2 his setting is effective forthe speaker output A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD DVD recorder see Switching audio chan nels on page 111 Surround sound settings Using the Virtual Surround Back mode This mode allows you to hear a virtual Surround back channel through your surround speakers You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information or if the material sounds better in the format for example 5 1 for which it was originally encoded you can have the receiver only apply this effect to 6 1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES gt 1 Open the Sound Setup menu 2 eem 3 Select a setting Select one of the following e Vir SB On Virtual Surround Back is always used for example on 5 1 encoded material e Vir SB Auto Virtual Surround Back is automatically applied to 6 1 encoded sources for example Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES DTS Neo 6 or Advanced Surround mode e Vir SB Off Virtual Surround Back mode is switched Select Virtual SB then press ENTER off 4 Press to exit LFE Attenuate Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra low bass tones Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra low bass tones from distorting the sound from the s
189. etween titles If you set the timer recording to use VPS PDC set this recorder s HDMI Control to Off page 159 VPS PDC works only with analog stations it does not work with digital TV stations VPS PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in your country area Check with the stations for compatibility he hours between 3 00 and 5 00 in the morning are used by the GUIDE Plus system to download programme information During these times VPS PDC may not work reliably leave VPS PDC off if you set a timer recording for these times Timer recordings with VPS PDC set to On are not performed for the period between 20 minutes before the start time of timer recordings for which EPG Link is set to On until the such recordings are completed page 87 If VPS PDC is active for two timer programmes that are programmed to start at the same time then the programme that actually starts first takes priority Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time This can be useful if a broadcast programme overruns for example Cancelling or extending the timer 1 LCD page 1 Press and hold for three seconds during a timer recording Recording continues but the timer indicator disappears from the front panel display indicating that the timer has been cancelled 2 Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute blocks Stopping a timer recording 1 GSJ LCD pa
190. except in LPCM mode or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off except in LPCM mode both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback DV Input Stereo 1 Select to use the live audio track recorded during the video shoot from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks Stereo 2 Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks Audio Out Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digitale Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played Dolby Digital Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output Use if your connected PCM equipment doesn t have a Dolby Digital decoder DTS Out One Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played Off Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played Use when your connected equipment doesn t have a DTS decoder In this case use the analog audio outputs The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation 96 kHz PCM Out 96 kHz 48 kHz Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output Use if your connected equipment doesn t support 96 kHz sampling rate 96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played MPEG Out MPEG Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being played MPEG PCM e Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output Use if your connected equipment doesn t have an MPE
191. ff the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality MN4 for DVD R RW then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead f there is very little free space left on the HDD an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully e If the HDD is being used for playback or high speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start the new timer recording will not replace the old one However the next time the timer recording starts both of the older two programmes will be erased 2 f you set the timer recording to use VPS PDC you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly For non VPS PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby Optimized Recording will not work if VPS PDC is on Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS PDC VPS PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input or when the recording mode is set to AUTO Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide Cn Setting a VIDEO Plus recording 1 Select Schedule from the Menu bar BBC2 25 May 10 10 EDZA E ETE k E Schedule displays programmes for Record Press W to use Press the Red button for VIDEO Plus recording
192. form the GUIDE Plus setup again to see if your external receiver can now be controlled he external receiver that you use is currently not supported If after leaving your external receiver on overnight and doing the Reception and External Receiver Setup again it still does not respond please call Customer Support to report your brand and model 1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information This can take up to 24 hours 04 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide My external receiver was successfully setup However have found that when the GUIDE Plus system has to change to a channel with a three digit programme number in the external receiver s preset it does not work It looks like the GUIDE Plus system can only send two digits With the number of channels increasing the number of digits has increased as well While older boxes use only two digits newer boxes require up to four It is possible that you selected an older code for your brand during set up Please access the Setup Area select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your brand Note Every time you see the on screen question about whether the receiver has changed to a certain channel the GUIDE Plus system has sent a different code Try all the different codes until your GUIDE Plus system can control your external receiver correctly If you have no success tr
193. found and successfully downloaded the recorder automatically scans for new digital channels informing you if any are found this is the equivalent of using the Add New Channel option found in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu Technical Information This displays the current hardware and software version numbers of the digital tuner Additional information Chapter 16 Additional information Minimum copying times The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video Please note that not all discs are compatible with high speed copying Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility eS ae Ee Se See 10h 8h 6h 4h 2h ile DVD R 1x DVD RW 1x 1x 6 mins 1 5 mins 10 mins 15 mins 30 mins 60 mins DVD disc type DVD RW 2x DVD R DL 2x 3 mins 4 mins 5 mins 7 5 mins 15 mins 30 mins DVD RAM 2x DVD R 2 4x DVD RW 2 4x 2 4x ay d 6 3 mins 12 5 mins 25 mins DVD R DL DVD RAM 3 l DVD RAM X 3x 2 mins 2 5 mins 3 5 mins 5 mins 10 mins 20 mins DVD R 4x DVD RW 4 UL 4x 1 5 mins 7 2 mins 7 2 5 mins 7 4 mins 7 5 mins 15 mins DVD RW 4x DVD R 8x 16x hei 6x 1 25 mins 7 1 6 mins 7 2 2 mins 7 3 mins 5 5 mins 11 mins DVD RW 8x Note that all times in the above table are approximate Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded 1 Titles recorded on DVD R RW in SEP SLP or EP modes cannot be high sp
194. front panel display When the recording ends the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed To cancel the set recording time press REC e f you want to pause recording at any time press Il Pause Press again to restart the recording If recording to the HDD DVD RAM or in VR mode a new chapter is started after recording restarts 8 Press to stop recording If you set the recording time in the previous step you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing STOP REC Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD DVD or after 12 hours of HDD recording whichever is sooner Note 1 Except during Chase Play NE eu OOS O E tip During recording you can turn on off the SCART loop through function During recording press the INPUT button LCD page 2 to switch to SCART THRU loop through on or SCART NORM loop through off Loop through is automatically reset to off after recording has finished Note that you can t switch loop through on if recording from the AV1 RGB TV connector Pause Live TV HDD The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV programme you re watching When you re ready to resume watching just press the gt Play button LCD page 1 Setting up for Pause Live TV You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link compatible TV connected using a SCART cable see 7V tuner setup for Pause
195. g Video mode recording e This video cannot be recorded to DVD R RW e This content is copy protected The video source is copy protected and cannot be recorded e Incorrect CPRM information The recorder could not read the CPRM information The recorder may be damaged please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs e Repairing disc During recording the power was cut This display appears when the e Repairing the HDD power is restored Could not repair the disc The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut The contents of the recording will be lost Overheating has stopped operation Press The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating DISPLAY to clear message limit If this message reappears please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs e HDD optimization is recommended This can The HDD should be optimized basically HDD housekeeping to be done using Disc Setup maintain playback and recording performance e Please perform HDD optimization This can The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain be done using Disc Setup performance Additional information 16 Message Explanation Action e The HDD has not been sufficiently If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is optimized Please optimize again likely that there is not eno
196. g a double sided DVD Video disc load it with the side you want to play face down f you want to play a DTS Audio CD please first read the note on page 104 3 4 5 gt Start playback If you re playing a DVD Video or Video CD a disc menu may appear when you start playback Use the 1 4V 9 buttons number buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus The Disc Navigator is automatically displayed for WMAV MPS3 files and Audio CDs see Using the Disc Navigator with playback only discs on page 107 This unit automatically searches for track names of Audio CDs see About the automatic display of titles on page 107 When playing video from the HDD playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached There may be a slight pause when playback switches from the first to the second layer of a dual layer disc See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs c Press to stop playback When you ve finished using the recorder eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby Playing DVD discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD Video and recordable DVD discs Press to start playback If RESUME is displayed on screen play back starts from the place last stopped LCD page 7 LCD page 7 Press to stop playback You can resume playback from the same point by pressing gt
197. ge f Press during a timer recording lt gt 2 Select Yes to confirm Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording child lock You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished SOURCE 1 If the recorder is on switch it into standby 2 P Front panel Press and hold for three seconds to lock the controls The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel LOCKED is briefly displayed again To unlock the recorder press and hold II Stop on the front panel while the recorder is stopped for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED e Even if you make child lock settings this recorder can still be controlled by the remote of a connected plasma television If you do not want this unit to be able to be controlled by another component when you have set a child lock turn this recorder s HDMI Control to Off page 159 Timer recording FAQ WV Frequently Asked Questions e Even though the timer is set the recorder doesn t start recording Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable not locked see Lock Disc on page 147 and that there are fewer than 99 999 titles already on the DVD HDD The recorder won t let me enter a timer programme Wh
198. h recording search by genre recommendations according to your profile and more For the GUIDE Plus system to function correctly it is important that you set the language and country correctly in the Setup Navigator and that you have performed a scan for available channels as these are all used by the GUIDE Plus system If any of these things are not yet set please run the Setup Navigator first see Switching on and setting up on page 68 TV listings information is received via Host Channels In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus system and download the TV listings information The initial download can take up to 24 hours but once this is done all future updates are automatic GUIDE Plus SHowView VIDEO Plus G LINK are 1 registered trademarks or trademarks of 2 manufactured under license from and 3 subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by or licensed to Gemstar TV Guide International Inc and or its related affiliates Legal Notice GEMSTAR TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC AND OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS SYSTEM IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC AND OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR INDIRECT SPEC
199. h the channel immediately or press RED to set the programme for recording immediately e Select a programme not yet started then press ENTER or RED to set the programme for recording 1 The general programme list does not show programmes that have already finished 2 For more information on timer programmes see About timer recordings on page 98 Using the digital electronic programme guide CH 3 Enter the timer recording settings VPS PDC Choose whether or not to use VPS PDC Use the buttons to select a field use the f 1 when making timer recordings of analog programmes buttons to change the value see About timer recordings on page 98 Auto Replace Rec Automatically erases the previous daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded d Timer Programme Set Genre Select a record genre for HDD recording only EPG Link UK only Choose whether or not to have this device automatically record scheduled programmes from the Digital EPG even if the times in which they are broadcast change Manhattan Open Tennis D TV003 SUN 1 4 18 00 19 00 Off Store Programme Enter Details Record To HDD Recording Mode XP VPS PDC EI HEN ees eS Set Detailed Set Title Name fJAuto Replace Rec Series Recording UK only Choose whether or not to Genre record all programmes from a series when you make a recording from the Digital EPG for HDD recordings only 5 After en
200. he Auto Channel Setting function to set this recorder s channel information page 154 Additional information m Problem Remedy HDMI Control does not e Verify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected page 65 respond e Check whether HDMI Control is set to On for this recorder the receiver subwoofer and the device connected to this recorder For more information refer to the operating instructions of your plasma television and HDMI Control on page 44 e Depending on the type of plasma television some HDMI input terminals do not support the HDMI Control function For details see the operating instructions supplied with your plasma television e f you want to use an HDMI cable other than the supplied HDMI cable use the one that supports the HDMI 1 3 specification The HDMI Control functions may not operate properly if you do not use an HDMI cable that supports the HDMI 1 3 specification e This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders connected to a single plasma television or the receiver subwoofer For more information refer to the operating instructions of your plasma television and HDMI Control on page 44 e Controls may not function properly in certain situations such as immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable turn this recorder s power off or remove the power cable for this recorder or the connected component If you experience any problems set HDMI Control to On for all connected units and then displa
201. he GUIDE Plus screen a Use for numeric entry Nielz Press to select the previous next page of information in the grid for example LCD Page 1 RIPE NI VI d lt lt B gt LCD Page 1 Press to select the previous next day One Button Record The RED Action button Record is visible anytime you can highlight a programme title including from the Grid after a search or in your recommendations in the My TV area The programme name date channel recording start and end times are all set automatically when you set a timer recording using One Button Record Note If you need to you can edit the settings at any time before the recording is due to start see Editing a scheduled recording on page 79 1 Highlight a programme title Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross mocks Rachel s choice of an over sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phoebe must choose between two unexpected BBC2 P02 10 30 60Min B EUM ONE Fimbles Starship gt Thrisa Welcome to GUIDE Plus Friends gt it v l This Alias The gt Sally Jessy Raph Our b Go five Armageddon gt slone News at Ten The Secret it v 2 Football Emmerdale Homes Polic gt anne One Button Recording Sanit 2 Press the RED Action button Record The programme is now set for recording When the programme is due to start the recorder will switch to the co
202. he disc menu Press MENU or TOP MENU to access o set audio language preferences see Aud o Language on page 156 3 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off HDD Recording Format on page 158 4 When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output you cannot switch the audio channel Set Dolby Digital Outto Dolby Digital PCM see Do by Digital Out on page 155 or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel e When playing a Dolby Digital source you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer see Dual mono setting on page 38 HDD DVD VR DVD RAM L R Both channels default L Left channel only R Right channel only CD Video CD WMA MP3 Stereo Stereo default 1 L Left channel only 2 R Right channel only Super VCD 1 Stereo Soundtrack 1 Stereo default 1 L Soundtrack 1 Left channel 1 R Soundtrack 1 Right channel 2 Stereo Soundtrack 2 Stereo 2 L Soundtrack 2 Left channel 2 R Soundtrack 2 Right channel Switching camera angles DVD Video Some DVD Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles checkthe disc boxfor details it should be marked with a Q9 icon if it contains multi angle scenes When a multi angle scene is playing the same icon appears on screen to let you k
203. he keyboard Select with ENTER MI Press the Green button to exit Please enter your personal search keyword Welcome to GUIDE Plus Saunt One Button Recording AAG BE P Te fas HAB avn Use the T buttons followed by ENTER to select characters from the on screen keyboard When you re finished press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue 6 Press ENTER to activate your profile You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5 You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and GREEN Action buttons Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide Cn The Schedule Area The Schedule Area is where you can set see edit and delete scheduled timer recordings From the Schedule Area you can Edit or delete a One Button Recording e Set edit or delete a VIDEO Plus recording e Set edit or delete a manual recording Editing a scheduled recording You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording or delete it if you no longer require it 1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording Delete a Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross 34 mocks Rachel s choice of an over sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phoebe must choose between two unexpected BBC2 P02 10 30 60Min B E LUN Schedule Grid Search Recording Schedule Qual Freq Dest 25 May Friends SP Once HDD Welcome to GUIDE Plus Cant One Button Recording e f y
204. he name of the station and the kind of show they re broadcasting for example One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program For example you can search for a station that s broadcasting a show with the program type Jazz You can search the following program types News News Finance Stock market reports Affairs Current Affairs commerce trading etc Info General Information Children Programs for children Sport Sport Social Social affairs Educate Educational Religion Programs concerning Drama Radio plays etc religion Culture National or regional Phone In Public expressing culture theater etc their views by phone Science Science and Travel Holiday type travel technology rather than traffic Varied Usually talk based announcements material such as quiz shows or Leisure Leisure interests and interviews hobbies Pop M Pop music Jazz Jazz Rock M Rock music Country Country music Easy M Easy listening Nation M Popular music in a Light M Light classical music language other than English Classics Serious classical Oldies Popular music from the music 50s and 60s Other M Music not fitting Folk M Folk music above categories Document Documentary Weather Weather reports Note Displaying RDS information You can display the different types of RDS information available Disp Display the
205. he title you want to change the thumbnail picture for ones 2 Select Edit gt Set Thumbnail from the command menu panel The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you can find the frame you want Gd Disc Navigator HDD 3 E P 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr 4 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 Title Name 4 Titles 20 00 FRI 3 12 pr Ese Section 20 00 Fri 3 12 pri Divide Chapter Edit i Set Genre 22 00 THU 2 12 Pr Lock 22 00 Thu 2 12 P 10Titles Recent first fo wi isd All Genres Cancel 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr 2 5 i 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP Remain Lodi ih00m 1 08 30h30m 3 Use the playback controls gt II lt lt gt gt etc LCD page 1 to find a suitable frame then press ENTER to set Set Thumbnail HDD 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 SP Rec time 2h00m H 10 1 00 00 09 15 NEN I Play Pause Exit You can also use the chapter and time search features press the YELLOW button and the CM SKIP CM BACK LCD page 1 4 Select Exit to return to the Edit screen Erase Section HDD DVD VR DVD RAM Using this command you can delete a part of a title ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV 1 Highlight the title containing the section you want to erase 2 Select Edit gt Erase Section from the command menu panel 3 HDD only Select the type of edit aD HDD DVD
206. hem down flat on their side to avoid accidents or injury Make sure to use a stable surface when assembling setting up and placing the speakers Home theater sound setup Depending on the size and characteristics of your room you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this system Standard surround setup This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5 1 channel home theater sound Front center R Front center L Receiver subwoofer Listening position Surround L Surround R Front surround setup This setup is ideal when rear Surround speaker placement isn t possible or you want to avoid running long speaker cables in your listening area Use this setup together with the Front Stage Surround Advance modes in page 33 Surround L Front center d Surround R Pipini R Receiver subwoofer Listening position Preparing the speakers This unit comes with speaker bases that can be used to adjust the speakers to the design of the room in which they are placed Using the supplied speaker bases 1 Attach the non skid pads to the speaker bases as shown below Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base of each speaker base Non skid pads x 16 Each speaker base Speaker Setup Guide 2 Attach the speaker bases Place the speaker atop a supplied speaker base and fix the base in place by using one of the supplied screw
207. his step otherwise jump to step 5 below Hom Choose item to set up Language English Country United Kingdom Welcome to Postal Code SW109AD GUIDE Plus External Receiver 1 None amet External Receiver 2 None External Receiver 3 None One Button Recording aug e See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on page 63 for more on using the supplied G LINK cable e Select External Receiver 1 2 or 3 then press ENTER If you have just one external receiver use External Receiver 1 You can add further receivers in 2 and 3 if you need to After pressing ENTER e Select your reception method Terrestrial Cable or Satellite e Select your provider if applicable e Select the brand of your external receiver e identify which input your external receiver is connected to After completing these steps the recorder will try and communicate with your external receiver and change the channel via the G LINK cable If the channel was successfully changed select Yes to confirm If the channel did not change select No The GUIDE Plus system will try other codes assigned to your external receiver If none of the codes changes the channel successfully tune your external receiver to the Host Channel for your country refer to step 5 below and leave it on overnight The recorder needs to be in standby it will wake up automatically and download new codes from the Host Channel The next day try this setup p
208. ically exited after a set period of inactivity HDMI Through Unknown No Genre HDMI C ERR 2C Can t use HDMI C ERR 1 Noisy Error MIC Error Speaker Over Temp OC Error1 OC Error2 BackUpERR Displays when you change the Listening Mode the volume level or some sound settings when the HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode The genre information for contents being played back on the HDD DVD recorder cannot be obtained There is no genre set for contents being played back on the HDD DVD recorder The connected component is not compatible with synchronized genre mode You tried to use Genre Sync Mode for a source component that does not support this function he source component is in a situation where Genre Sync Mode cannot be used You tried to use Genre Sync Mode when the input source of this unit is a source other than HDMI he operation is forbidden due to the surround settings When the volume level is over 51 some functions are restricted Check if the HDMI cable is properly connected If the cable is properly connected this unit may be damaged In such an event please contact a Pioneer authorized service center or your nearest dealer Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is not connected properly An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers
209. in to restart lt lt Press to start reverse forward scanning lt lt gt e Press to jump to the start of the previous next chapter track lt 11 lt 1 Il I Use for slow motion and step frame 11 ZOOM Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image 12 DISP Press to display information 13 Number buttons Use to enter title chapter or track numbers etc ENTER Press to select an option or execute a command CLEAR Press to clear a numeric entry etc 14 PLAY MODE Press to change the Play Mode repeat play for example 15 VIDEO ADJ Press to display the Video Adjust screen Controls and displays Operating a Pioneer DVD player DVD 1 2 DVD 2 2 1 SOURCE Switches the power for a DVD player to On Standby 2 PAGE lt gt Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present 3 TOP MENU Press to display the top menu of a DVD Video disc 4 MENU Displays a DVD disc menu this varies with the disc and may be the same as the top menu 5 t 3 e cursor buttons and ENTER Moves the cursor around the screen Press ENTER to select the current menu option 6 HOME MENU Display exit the on screen display 7 RETURN Returns to the previously displayed menu screen LCD touch screen 8 AUDIO Press to select the audio channel or language SUBTITLE Press to select a subtitle display y ANGLE Press to ch
210. ing 0 About timer recordings DVD VR DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM HDD Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance Timer recording programmes can be set to record just once every day or every week You can setthe recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording but with the added option of an AUTO mode which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc if recording to DVD or to fit on to a blank DVD disc if recording to the HDD You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD orto the hard disk drive For regular daily or weekly HDD timer recordings that you don t need to keep you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one Note that when you use this feature the previous recording made on that timer programme will be replaced by the next one regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set see Optimized Rec on page 157 for more on this Finally if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isn t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording the Recovery Recording feature will automatically
211. ing modes These modes cannot be used at the same time 3 e 4 Use the buttons to select Bass or Treble use the f buttons to adjust the sound then press ENTER to confirm e Bass and Treble can be adjusted from 6dB to 6dB e When the Bass or Treble is set to something other than OdB the TONE indicator lights Adjusting sound delay Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture By adding a bit of delay you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video There are a total of 60 steps levels that you can adjust with a total range of 200 msec 1 Souno Press to open the sound menu gt Select Sound Delay then press ENTER 3 Select the length of the delay in sound then press ENTER to confirm This option is deactivated and not displayed if you have AutoDelay set to On in HDMI Setup see Setting the Auto Delay on page 46 2 Hz audio streams you cannot select Tone if a mode other than Bass Hz audio streams you cannot select a mode other than Bass Treble Listening to the radio Cum Chapter 7 Listening to the radio A Important e To listen to the radio press the FM AM button to set the remote control to FM AM control mode The LCD screen on the remote contro changes to the FM AM screen Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts
212. ings available which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time When Manual Recording is set to On see Manual Recording on page 157 a further option will be available MN1 to MN32 LPCM or XP a super high quality HDD recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15 Mbps depending on what you set When recording to DVD MN32 is the highest recording quality available If you select XP the recording mode will automatically revert to MN32 When recording to DVD R RW SLP is the longest recording time available If you select SEP or MN1 to MN3 the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP LCD page 1 Press repeatedly to select the recording quality e XP High quality setting gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc SP Standard Play Default quality used for most applications gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD LP Long Play Lower video quality than SP but doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four hours EP Extended Play Lower quality than LP but gives about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc SLP Super Long Play Lower quality than EP but gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc SEP Super Extended Play Lowest video quality but gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD disc MN1 to MN32 LPCM XP Manual Linear PCM XP available only when manual recording is on
213. input will not change and the remote changes to Receiver mode To return to the previous operating mode press RCV once more Using the LCD touch screen Depending on the type of connected component you are operating such as an HDD DVD recorder there may be multiple pages of information for the LCD touch screen When the component you would like to control is not displayed press PAGE to scroll to the page where the component you would like to control is located e When no operations are carried out for over 10 seconds the display on the LCD touch screen of the remote control is automatically turned off To have the display shown once again either touch the LCD or press a button on the remote control Watching a DVD Remember that when using the remote to control the supplied HDD DVD recorder you should point the remote towards the display unit not the recorder itself RECEIVER 1 Switch on the receiver subwoofer 2 Set the remote control to HDD DVR mode The LCD screen changes to that for the HDD DVD recorder and you can then operate the desired component see Choosing and operating a source component above SOURCE 3 Switch on the HDD DVD recorder 4 Switch on your TV Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the HDMI video input 5 E Press to select DVD 6 ree Press on the HDD DVD recorder to open the disc tray Before you start 7 Load a disc Load a disc with the label
214. inue rotating the picture in increments of 90 Reloading files from a disc or USB device If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and or 100 folders you can still view all the images using the reload function 1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list Read next 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files 99 folders from the disc or connected USB device It will take a moment at most a few minutes to load in the images Note Importing files to the HDD You can import files and save them to the HDD from a CD DVD or a connected USB camera Once on the HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print them out if you ve connected a PictBridge compatible printer I 1 Select the location of folders files you want to import To import a whole folder select the desired folder press wb and skip to step 3 below e To import multiple folders use the Multi Mode see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143 2 Select a file to import then press To import multiple files use the Multi Mode see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 148 T 3 Select Copy to HDD from the menu HR PhotoViewer CD DVD Folder2 001 PIOROO00 Start Slideshow 002 PIOROO01 S Copy all to HDD 003 PIORo002 004 PIORO003 Print 2 g Detailed Information 005 PIOROO04 Multi Mode Folder Size 999 MB AIIE 006 PIOROO05 007 PIOROO06 a 008 PIOROO07
215. io is bilingual and you are recording to DVD R RW Video mode DVD R RW or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On or on the LPCM setting use the Bilingual Recording setting page 155 to select the A L or B R audio channel to record before recording starts In other cases both channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on playback Restrictions on video recording You cannot record copy protected video using this recorder Copy protected video includes DVD Video discs and some satellite broadcasts If copy protected material is encountered during a recording recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on screen Video that is copy once only can only be recorded to DVD RAM or HDD CPRM compatible VR mode DVD R RW see below When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input you can display copy control information on screen see Displaying disc information on screen on page 112 CPRM CPRM is a copy protection scrambling system developed for the recording of copy once broadcast programmes CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media This recorderis CPRM compatible which means that you can record copy once broadcast programmes but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM compatible DVD R ver 2 0 8x or higher or DVD RW ver 1 1 or higher discs formatted in VR
216. ion or Search Result is displayed 2 In the Date field select a date within one week to search in Date 4 Sun 12 Sep ee QE ND UJ In the Time field select the time of day 0 00 to 23 00 to search in e A In the Genre field select the genre to search for You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER after each genre Select OK E gt 6 Select Search The results of your search are displayed Ul 1 Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster his function may not be applicable to all programmes Bewdmg O QU Chapter 6 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record to DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM DVD R DL and DVD R DL media DVD R and DVD RW discs can be initialized for Video mode or VR mode recording Each has its advantages and it depends on what you want to do with the recording which mode you choose If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting copying and changing the way the video is presented Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing but it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard DVD players many of which won t play VR mode discs Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode all recording on that disc will be in that mode DVD RW discs can be initialized f
217. is complete the recorder will let you know how many new channels were found The country setting will apply to both the digital and analog TV tuners The clock will also be set automatically here if D TV channels are found e f no new channels were found a message appears asking if you want to scan again Check the aerial connection before selecting Yes If you select No skip to step 8 below 1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting the highlight jumps back to Off check that the antenna is properly connected and that it is not shorted then try making the setting again Getting started 8 Select the analog TV A TV Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan or Download from TV or Do not set Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan Download from TV Do not Set e Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup because they have already been set up for example You can only use the Download from TV feature if this recorder is connected to your TV using a fully wired 21 pin SCART cable via the AV1 RGB TV connector and if your TV supports this function check your TV s instruction manual for more details Select your country Country Selection Country 4 UK gt e Auto tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets Tuning e Downloading channels from your TV Use the Download from TV option to download all the
218. is recorder is connected to a compatible TV using a fully wired 21 pin SCART cable the recorder will take a few seconds to download country TV screen size and language information Check the manual that came with your TV for compatibility information 3 Choose a language then press ENTER D Initial Setup A Basic Clocl Language Digital Tuner Input O English francais Analogue Tuner Powt Deutsch Italiano Video In Out HELF Espanol Nederlands Audio In EPG Svenska Pycckuin Audio Out Setup EAANVIKa Polski Language Cestina Norsk Recording wv Note 4 Start the Setup Navigator Complete this setup before you start using your recorder Start Cancel Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings e f you don t want to use the Setup Navigator press amp to select Cancel then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator 5 Select an Aerial Power setting for the built in digital tuner On power is always supplied to the connected aerial whether the recorder is on or in standby Auto power is only supplied when this recorder is on Off power is never supplied to the aerial 6 Select Auto Scan to start scanning for D TV channels e Select Do not set if you want to skip D TV channel setup because they have already been set up for example then skip to step 8 below 7 Select your country The recorder starts scanning for new channels After the scan
219. is shown on screen and in the front panel display e To switch off subtitles press amp then CLEAR LCD page 2 Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks DVD Video DivX When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two or more soundtracks often in different languages you can switch the soundtrack during playback Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options a LCD page 3 Change the audio soundtrack The current audio language is shown on screen and in the front panel display e The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks Switching audio channels DVD VR DVD RAM HDD CD VideoCD SuperVCD WMA MP3 For HDD and VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio you can switch between left L channel right R channel or both L R 4 When playing Video CDs and Audio CDs you can switch between stereo just the left channel or just the right channel Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each 3 LCD page 3 Press repeatedly to display switch the audio channel The audio channel s currently playing are indicated on screen 1 Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu Press MENU or TOP MENU to access o set subtitle preferences see Subtitle Language on page 156 2 e Some discs only allow you to change audio language from t
220. is weak Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal some stations For more sensitive tuning connect an outdoor antenna HDMI Symptom Remedy No picture or sound This receiver is HDCP compatible Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP compatible Depending on the connected source component it s possible that it will not work with this receiver even if it is HDCP compatible e f the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support No sound or sound suddenly Check that the HDMI Mode setting is set to AMP Mode Through Mode ceases e f the component is a DVI device use a separate connection for the audio Check the audio output settings of the source component 11 Additional information Displayed Messages Message Description 192kHz PCM SACD DTS HD DTS Express Dolby TrueHD Dolby D No MIC These messages are displayed when you operate a function incompatible with the audio source being played back Displays when you press MCACC when the MCACC setup mic is not connected Muting 2ch Only Displays when you press TEST TONE or MCACC while this unit is muted An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources while the Exit current source is a multichannel source Appears when a menu is automat
221. isplayed By track Displays the tracks of the selected artist album When you select All tracks of the all artist album are displayed Play List Original Displays the settings of Display Mode By artist Play List 1 to Play List 4 Displays the tracks added to each play list Favourites Displays up to 25 tracks you listen to most frequently Copying albums tracks You can copy the albums stored on the HDD to other folders of a different artist on the HDD Also you can copy the tracks stored on the HDD to other albums on the HDD You cannot copy the albums tracks stored on the HDD to a DVD or a USB device 1 LCD page 1 Press to display the Jukebox screen Note 2 Select an album track you want to copy 3 Select Edit gt Copy Album or Copy Track from the command menu 4 Select an artist album you want to copy the selected album track to Select New Artist or New Album if you want to create a new artist album The name of an artist album becomes A number A number F number Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel Editing the HDD Jukebox A number of commands are available for editing and changing the playback behavior of albums 1 LCD page 1 Press to display the Jukebox screen 2 Select what you want to edit gt 3 Select an edit function from the command menu panel Erase Deletes the selected artist aloum track
222. ist 6 Artiste 7 Artist7 Artisti 10 Artists s Artist NL O Original Total 10 The album display changes for the selected artist when you press ENTER e This step is for the display mode set to Artist The operation varies when the display mode is setto other settings e To play back all artists select All and proceed to step 6 Press Q or amp amp LCD page 3 to change the page Select the album you want to play back Press ENTER to change the track display for the selected album To play back all albums select All and proceed to step 6 5 Select the track you want to play back e To play back all tracks select All LEZ 11 Using the Jukebox 6 Display the command menu Jukebox HDD Track List 10 Tracks ALL lace 2 Track Edit ifm 3 Track3 Repeat d T Original 4 Track4 Add to Play List 5 Track5 j Play List Name 6 Track6 7 Track7 Track1 MP3 8GB classical 7 Select Play from the menu Repeat play Display the command menu during Select Repeat from the menu e Select Play Mode when audio files stored on a USB device are being played back see 7he Play Mode menu on page 109 Select a repeat function from the command menu panel Artist Repeat Repeats all tracks of an artist being played back Album Repeat Repeats all tracks of an album being played back Track Repeat Repeats the track b
223. istings data Leave the recorder in standby overnight For external receiver users only The connections and setup are OK but the external receiver was not tuned to the correct Host Channel Check the list of Host Channels see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE Plus amp system on page 71 and leave the recorder in standby and the external receiver on overnight tuned to the correct Host Channel You live in a country region where the GUIDE Plus system is not yet available Check the list of countries to see if you are in a region that is supported used the One Button Record feature red Action button to set a recording but recorded the wrong channel If the channel to be recorded is received via the external receiver first make sure that the external receiver was left switched on Next in the Editor Area make sure that the channel to be recorded is correctly set Access the Editor Area Check the source and programme number of the channel that you wanted to record Change the source and preset numbers if incorrect If you are recording from the recorder s internal tuner the A TV or D TV setting make sure that the programme number is the same as the preset number set on this recorder If they are different go to the Editor Area and change the programme number to match the recorder s preset number The TV listings information doesn t update The latest TV listings information is automatically
224. it tunes to the channel This is normal Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide Cn Searching You can search for programmes by category subcategory or by keyword My Choice Categories for searching include Movies purple Sport green Children blue and Others teal In some countries there is a further subcategory available called Tip of the Day These are programmes recommended by a local partner such as a IV magazine 1 Select Search from the Menu bar 2 Select a category and a subcategory z Search displays programme listings by categories of interest 24 Press w to use for Grid for My TV NEN Sach ND Welcome to GUIDE Plus aun One Button Recording aun e f you choose All as the subcategory all programmes in the category you selected will show up in the search results 3 Start the search The search results are shown sorted by time and date e f no search results are displayed it means there are no programmes for the current day that match your search criteria Using My Choice keywords for a search In addition to the standard categories you can also set your own keywords Access My Choice 2 Press ENTER to search My Choice gt programmes 4 w 324 for other My Choice categories Press for Movies Grid Schedule My Choice Welcome to GUIDE Plus Caunet One Button Recording anet 2 Press the YELLOW Action button to ad
225. ital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended by directors and producers It also features multi channel sound with discrete channel output interactive mixing and streaming capability in advanced systems Supported by High Definition Media Interface HDMI a single cable digital connection is possible for high definition audio and video Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is the next generation lossless encoding technology developed for high definition optical discs in the upcoming era Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit for bit identical to the studio master unlocking the true high definition entertainment experience on high definition optical discs in the next generation When coupled with high definition video Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience with stunning sound and high definition picture It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full range channels individually with 24 bit 96 kHz audio It also features extensive metadata including dialogue normalization and dynamic range control Supported by High Definition Media Interface HDMI a single cable digital connection is possible for high definition audio and video HD DVD and Blu ray Disc standards currently limit their maximum number of audio channels to eight whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than eight audio channels Manufactured under license from Dolby Labo
226. ized Check that the USB cable is inserted fully Check that the USB device is powered on Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu page 160 f several USB devices camera USB memory card reader etc are connected at the same time it s possible that only the first device connected to this recorder will be recognized File names are not e Files names that do not conform to the SO8859 1 standard may not display correctly on displayed properly this recorder ED Additional information HDMI Problem Remedy The connected HDMI or e Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable while the power of both components DVI device does not is on display any picture and e Try switching the power of the HDMI DVI device off then back on the front panel HDMI e Try switching off the HDMI DVI device and this recorder Next switch on the HDMI DVI indicator does not light device and leave it for around 30 seconds then switch on this recorder e When you connect an HDMI compatible device make sure of the following The connected device s video input is set correctly for this recorder The cable you re using is fully HDMI compliant Using a non standard cable may result in no picture being output Don t use several HDMI cables connected together Use a single cable to connect devices together e When you connect a DVI compatibl
227. jack on the side panel to the optical output of an external playback component These include digital components such as an MD player digital satellite or a game system You can also use the OPTICAL IN 1 jack to connect external components when not using it for sound input from a TV Connecting an analog audio component You can use the ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks to connect an analog audio component such as a tape player Receiver subwoofer Side panel Tape player MD DAT etc You can use the F AUDIO input jack on the display unit to easily playback audio from a digital audio player or PC Use a stereo mini plug cable to connect a source to the display unit e When you connect a cable to the F AUDIO jack this unit s input automatically switches to Front Audio In Display unit F AUDIO e F AUDIO Q From analog audio output Digital audio player etc Stereo mini plug cable Other connections Cm Connecting an iPod You can use the iPod jack on the display unit to playback music from an iPod All operations can be carried out via the iPod Use the supplied iPod cable to connect an iPod to this unit When you connect an iPod this unit s input automatically switches to iPod e Certain iPod models have connectors that are not compatible with this unit Display unit iPod cable iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc register
228. l Clock Setting 1 2 England Time Zone i London Summer Time 4 On gt 03 Getting started Set the date day month year and time then press ENTER to make all the settings Manual Clock Setting 2 2 Date MON 01 01 2007 w Time 00 00 Time Zone England London Summer Time On e Use the buttons to change the value in the highlighted field e Use the m w buttons to move from one field to another You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN 10 Select the EPG Electronic Programme Guide type to use GUIDE Plus Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus EPG see also Setting up the GUIDE Plus system on page 71 and Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide on page 74 Digital EPG Use the SI EPG programme information broadcast together with digital channels e f no channels were found when scanning for digital TV channelsthen this screen does not appear and the EPG is set according to the country set in step 7 above 11 Select the TV screen type Wide 16 9 or Standard 4 3 TV Screen Size OWide 16 9 Standard 4 3 12 Press to continue after reading the HDD caution In the event of HDD failure recordings may be lost or normal playback recording may not be possible As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD failure we recommend to use the HDD only as temporary storage media Please copy
229. l receiver The programme number is the number on which the channel can be found on its receiving device source The entry in the Editor screen must match this number for correct recording of that channel The above is especially important for the Host Channel Please make sure that the Host Channel is always switched ON 177899 M LCD page 2 Change the programme numbers as you like Changing the programme numbers allows you to decide the order in which the channels change when stepping through them sequentially You can do this to group certain channels together for example Editor displays your channel settings You may switch channels On blue or Off grey select their Source and their Programme Number Press w to use Press for Info Press gt for Setup My TV Schedule Info Editor D TV 001 D TV 002 PU 003 D 004 D ITV 0 ESTA 007 DEBE SH D TV 014 017 Welcome to GUIDE Plus aunt One Button Recording Caunet D TV 3 When you re done press the BLUE Action button Home to get back to the GUIDE Plus home screen Youcan find detailed information on using the GUIDE Plus system in the following chapter 04 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide Chapter 4 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select setting made in the Setup Navigator or the Initial Setup
230. l work with HDMI Control compatible components other than those made by Pioneer A Important Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen as shown below RECEIVER ADV F S SURR SURR Making the HDMI Control connections You can use synchronized operation for a connected plasma television and up to three other components including a maximum of two recorders or players Be sure to connect the plasma television s audio cable to the audio input of this unit e f you use a commercially available HDMI cable check whether the cable supports the HDMI 1 3 standard Otherwise the HDMI Control function may not operate properly HDD DVD Recorder SDVR LX70D Receiver subwoofer Rear panel Side panel From digital audio output optical From Audio output To HDMI input wi E HDMI Control compatible Pioneer plasma television HDMI Control Connect the plasma television directly to this unit Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors HDMI Control compatible Pioneer plasma television HDMI input HDMI cable HDMI output O Other amps or AV converter HDMI input HDMI cable HDMI OUT Receiver subwoofer Only connect components you intend to use as a s
231. lay Timing and Genre Welcome to GUIDE Plus anit One Button Recording Select from AUTO XP SP LP EP SLP SEP or a manual recording mode see Manual Recording on page 157 and Manual recording modes on page 164 1 See About timer recordings on page 98 for more information about scheduled recordings 2 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc Can also be used when recording to HDD 04 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide 7 Press the GREEN Action button Frequency to change the recording frequency BBC2 25 May 10 10 METERA Home a Jo Recording Quality LP Recording Frequency Every Tuesday Recording Destination HDD Timers set 1 32 VPS PDC 0 8 Press to display Timing and Genre Grid Search Recording Schedule Qual Freq _ Dest 25 May Friends LP Tue HDD Welcome to GUIDE Plus aet One Button Recording aet Select from the various options for one time daily and weekly recordings 8 Press YELLOW Action button Destination to select the recording destination BBC2 25 May 10 10 Quality Frequency Recording Quality LP Recording Frequency Every Tuesday Recording Destination HDD Auto Replace Recording Timers set 1 32 VPS PDC 0 8 Press to display Timing and Genre Grid Search Welcome to GUIDE Plus aet One Button Recording aet Select from D
232. les in your copy list erasing chapters you don t need or re naming titles for example Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual video content only the virtual content of the Copy List So you can freely erase and modify anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the actual content is not being altered Copying from HDD to DVD A Important he recorder can only store one Copy List at a time The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System setting is changed see Additional information about the TV system settings on page 161 Resetting the recorder to its factory settings see Resetting the recorder on page 175 will erase the Copy List 1 Load a recordable DVD It is possible to complete the following steps without having a recordable DVD loaded or having an uninitialized DVD loaded however the steps are slightly different If you want to use a DVD RW VR mode disc for the copy make sure it is initialized before you start 2 Select Copy from the Home Menu 1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 Video Mode Off or MN1 to MNS8 Video Mode On Copying and backup Select HDD DVD HDD gt DVD DVD CD gt HDD Disc Back up e If this is the first time to create a Copy List skip to step 5 below 4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the recorder choose whether to Create New Copy List or Continue Using Previous Cop
233. lignment with the connector on the player 3 Use the HDMI 1 to 3 button to select the HDMI input you ve connected to for example HDMI 2 You can also use the display unit INPUT SELECTOR to carry out this operation e Set the HDMI Mode in HDM mode setting below to Through Mode if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV or plasma television no sound will be heard from this receiver e f the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma television try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display HDMI mode setting Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver subwoofer amp or through to a TV or plasma television You cannot use a number of sound functions of this unit when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode A Important e Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen 1 Press SETUP e Em Select HDMI Setup then press ENTER e ee o Select HDMI Mode then press ENTER 4 confirm AMP Mode Output an HDMI audio signal from this unit Through Mode Output an HDMI audio signal from a TV or plasma television The HDMI THROUGH indicator lights Adjust the setting then press ENTER to About HDMI HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD playe
234. lly each track on a CD or DVD is categorized and copied onto the HDD on the basis of information on artists and albums Note that once copied to the HDD audio tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD disc A Important While copying no other recorder operation is possible When copying scheduled timer recordings will not start until copying is complete Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully 1 Load the CD DVD you want to copy to the HDD 2 LCD page 1 Select the DVD 3 NAVIGATOR Open the Disc Navigator This unit automatically searches for titles of an Audio CD see About the automatic display of titles on page 107 Note 4 Display the command menu The command menu panel amp 2 pisc Navigator DVD CD Track List 10 Tracks 1 TRACK1 Play 2 TRACK2 Track Name S TRACKS zt 1 1 4 TRACK4 Play Mode TRACKS TRACK6 TRACK7 8 TRACK8 3 TRACK1 650MB 0 04 30 1 14 00 classical gt TRACK3 0 05 30 Track Repeat Stereo a 10 00 00 O Cn HDD Select Copy all to HDD from the menu On pressing ENTER all tracks or files on the CD are copied to the HDD e When a folder of WMA MPS3 files is selected you can copy only the files contained in the folder by using Copy to HDD You can also copy tracks or files by selecting Copy gt DVD CD HDD and pressing ENTER from the Home Menu For an Audio CD a track check screen is displayed You
235. lock icon 4 Titles ar D Play List 20 00 FRI 3 12 NE 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr9 SP 2h00m 1 0G 22 00 THU 2 12 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr7 SP 1h00m 1 0G 19 00 MON 29 11 VD 3 Mode 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP Remain 1h00m 1 0G 0h30m E Insert position After pressing ENTER the new updated Play List is displayed Combine DVD VR DVD RAM P ay List only Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one 1 Highlight the title you want to combine This title will remain in the same place after combining with another title Select Edit gt Combine from the command menu panel 2 Disc Navigator DVD 10Titles B 23 00 FRI 3 12 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr Title Name 4 Titles Set Thumbnail Erase Section KM 20 00 FRI 3 12 w FERE 20 00 Fri 3 12 py DMO Play List i Chapter Edit Move 2 3 22 00 THU 2 12 li 22 00 Thu 2 12 F Cancel 19 00 MON 29 11 4 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP i 1h00m 1 0G first This title will be appended to the first title selected The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended to title 1 24 Disc Navigator DVD E 10Titles B 23 00 FRI 3 12 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 SP 4 Titles 2h00m 1 0G amm 2 Play List t 20 00 FRI 3 12 77 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr9 SP T j 2h00m 1 08 e F 3 1 22 00 THU 2 12 i 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr7 SP 1h
236. lready done so the HDD will be partly optimized 1 Select Disc Setup from the Home Menu 4 2 Select Optimize HDD then Start DB Disc Setup Basic Optimize HDD gt Start Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go If no actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the optimization process is completed the unit turns itself off Initialize HDD HDD When your HDD DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu However if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it 1 Select Disc Setup from the Home Menu 2 Select Initialize HDD then Start D disc Setup Basic Initialize HDD gt Start Initialize Finalize The Video Adjust menu H Chapter 14 The Video Adjust menu Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built in tuner and external input for disc playback and for recording Setting the picture quality for TV and external input Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built in TV tuner and for the external input There are several preset settings that suit various sources or you can create up to three of your own sets Choosing a preset 1
237. me unsuitable set A Delay to Off and adjust the sound delay settings manually page 34 Audio input settings from Plasma televisions TV Input To listen to audio from a plasma television on this device you will need to connect an audio cable other than an HDMI cable From this menu set the audio input to that which you would like to connect Press TV on the remote control to switch this unit to the input source selected here This setting is changed to the selected input and the audio from the plasma television is output from this device Select from inputs Digital 1 Digital 2 and Analog 1 Press SETUP gt 2 Select System Setup then press ENTER gt 3 Select TV Input then press ENTER 4 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm A Important e You must set this setting to activate the HDMI Control function Before using synchronization Once you have finished all connections and settings you must 1 Putall components into standby mode 2 Turn the power ON for all components with the power for the plasma television being turned on last 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this unit and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not Synchronized amp mode Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an operation for the plasma television For more information see the operating instructions of your plasma television
238. minal 2 HDMIIN connectors x3 Use high quality audio video connection with compatible HDMI devices Connect the included HDD DVD recorder to HDMI IN 1 To select this input choose HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 3 SYSTEM connector Connect to the display unit Side panel here is a cover over the connectors on the side panel A When making connections lift the two hooks and remove the cover B Once connections are finished line up the three positions and place the cover back in its original position 4 CONTROL OUT jacks x2 Connect the supplied HDD DVD recorder to the CONTROL OUT 1 jack with the supplied control cable You can connect another component to the other Control Out jack 5 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN jacks x2 To listen to optical digital audio change the input to Digital 1 or Digital 2 When the digital output jacks of your TV are connected to these jacks set TV Input see page 46 6 AMLOOP antenna terminal 7 FM antenna socket 8 ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks Handle sound from an external component by using stereo audio code To listen to analog audio change the input to Analog When the analog output jacks of your TV are connected to these jacks set TV Input see page 46 9 SPEAKERS terminals Match the colours of the speaker cords to their respective connectors 10 ACIN Power inlet A Important You must connect the supplied HDD DVD recorder with a control cable If not the HDD DVD rec
239. mme list can contain up to 24 titles chapters folders tracks 4 gt LCD page 1 Play the programme list Programme play remains active until you cancel programme play erase the programme list ejectthe disc or switch off the recorder e Tip osave your programme list and exit the programme edit screen without starting playback press HOME MENU e During programme play press P Next LCD page 1 to skip to the next programme step To repeat play the programme list select Programme Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu see Repeat play on page 110 Except CD WMA MP3 Press CLEAR LCD page 2 during playback to switch off programme play if no menu OSD such as the Disc Navigator is displayed Press while stopped to erase the programme list From the programme menu you can also Start Programme Play Starts playback of a saved programme list Cancel Programme Play Turns off programme play but does not erase the programme list Erase Programme List Frases the programme list and turns off programme play Displaying and switching subtitles DVD Video DivX Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more languages the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available You can switch subtitle language during playback Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options Note LCD page 3 Select change the subtitle language The current subtitle language
240. mode DVD RAM discs or on the HDD DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying You are advised to check carefully what constitutes lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy Copying of copyrighted material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Using the built in A TV and D TV tuners Switching between A TV and D TV tuners LCD page 2 Press to switch between D TV digital and A TV analog Changing channels There are a number of ways to select analog and digital TV channels Note that you can t change the TV channel during playback recording or during recording standby CH e EU CH buttons LCD page 2 Number buttons LCD page 2 For example to select channel 4 digital channel D004 press 4 then ENTER for channel
241. n I tried setting up my external receiver could not get any of the attempts to work what should do There could be several reasons why your external receiver could not be controlled The connections could be wrong Make sure that the G LINK cable is connected to the G LINK connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in front of the external receiver pointing towards the IR receiver of your external receiver See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on page 63 he code that is listed under your brand could be wrong Please try other codes for your brand under satellite cable orterrestrial Goto the Setup Area and choose one of the three options cable satellite or terrestrial that you have not already tried Follow the on screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE Plus system can change channels on your external receiver If it does not work repeat the process choosing different reception and external receiver combinations until you have tried all the codes for your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE Plus system If it still does not work see below on how to receive new codes overnight The unit has not yet received new codes The nightly data downloads frequently include new codes for controlling external receivers Please tune your external receiverto your local Host Channel and leave iton overnight Switch this recorder into standby The next morning please per
242. n have a connected plasma television and the receiver subwoofer automatically change inputs when playback begins on this unit including when you have a GUI such as Disc Navigator set to display on this unit Certain connected plasma televisions may have their power turned from off to on when using this function Simultaneous power function You can have this unit turn on automatically when the power for a connected plasma television is turned on To have this unit s power turned off when a connected plasma television is turned off you must change the simultaneous power function of your plasma television Unified language function By receiving language information from a connected plasma television you can have this unit s language settings automatically change to those of the plasma television language information can be received only when no media is being played back and no recordings are taking place or when you choose not to display this unit s GUI displays A Important Depending on the type of plasma television some HDMI input terminals do not support the HDMI Control function For details see the operating instructions supplied with your plasma television e To use the following functions set this unit s HDMI Control to Off page 159 he timer recording to use VPS PDC page 98 When you want this unit to automatically switch off upon completion of timer recording When HDMI Control is set to On this
243. n of each button will be described on screen and changes depending on the screen being displayed 9 GUIDE Press to display the EPG screen press again to exit 10 INFO While watching D TV press to display information banner HDD DVR 3 3 STOP REC rec ee MODE B HELP TIMER TIMER j REC ON OFF 11 HDD DVD Press to select the hard disk HDD or DVD for recording and playback 12 JUKEBOX page 134 Press to display the Jukebox screen of the HDD DVD recorder from where you can copy music to the HDD for playback Controls and displays 13 P LIVE TV page 96 Press to start recording the current TV channel but with playback paused effectively pausing the broadcast 14 Playback controls page 103 Press to start playback BH Press to stop playback lI Press to pause playback or recording lt lt lt Il I gt gt page 108 109 Press to start reverse or forward scanning Press again to change the speed While paused press and hold to start slow motion playback Press repeatedly to change the playback speed While paused press to advance a single frame in either direction When GUIDE Plus is displayed use to display the previous next day lt lt gt P Press to skip to the previous or next title chapter track or to display the previous or next menu page When GUIDE Plus is displayed use to display the previous next page 15 CM BACK commercial
244. n the action Original Channel Balance amp Channel Mix Since the orientation of the supplied speaker units is uniquely designed channels are mixed down and balanced in a special manner Also the optimum balance is automatically achieved according to the contents being played back Frequency Characteristic Correction Realizes the playback characteristic optimized for long hours of listening in addition to the added features of the supplied speaker units Note Stereo Playback in Surround Outputs audio from the surround speakers while directing vocal sound to the front channels You can play back stereo sources like CDs in seamless comfortable surround sound This effect is available when you play back stereo sources in the Auto listening mode see below The Effective sound mode can be turned off activating Direct mode by doing the following e ill Press to switch to Direct Sound Press this button to switch between Effective Sound and Direct Sound e When Direct Sound is selected the DIRECT indicator lights Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material If you set up the system for Front surround page 6 the Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results see page 33 surel Press to select the Auto listening mode Listening in surround sound You can lis
245. na vinyl coated Wire 7777 5 mto6 m Outdoor antenna Note About control out connections Many Pioneer components support CONTROL connections by which you can use the remote controls of any connected components by aiming them at the sensor of just one component When you use a remote control the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component If you choose to use this feature you must make sure that you also have at least one set of HDMI or analog audio jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes e Using a cable with mono mini plugs on either side sold separately connect the CONTROL IN jack on another Pioneer component to the CONTROL OUT jack on the receiver subwoofer This will allow you to control the other component by pointing its remote at the display unit supplied with this receiver subwoofer Connecting using HDMI If you have an HDMI or DVI with HDCP equipped component you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video as well as almost every kind of digital audio thatthe connected component is compatible with including DVD Video DVD Audio SACD Blu ray Disc Video CD Super VCD CD and MP3 etc Receiver subwoofer Rear panel l From HDMI output wL E O HDMI DVI equipped component 1 e An HDMI conn
246. nd finalize discs The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu Basic settings Input Disc Name DVD VR DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM When you initialize a disc for recording the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on screen 1 Select Disc Setup from the Home Menu 2 Select Basic gt Input Disc Name gt Next Screen m Disc Setup Basic Input Disc Name Next Screen Initialize Lock Disc Finalize DVD RW Auto Init Optimize HDD gt 3 Input a name for the disc The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD R RW e See Title Name on page 120 for more on navigating the input screen Lock Disc DVD VR DVD RAM Default setting Off Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording editing or erasing of the disc Note A Important A locked disc can still be initialized which will completely erase the disc 1 Select Disc Setup from the Home Menu l v Select Basic gt Lock Disc then On or Off DB Disc Setup Basic Input Disc Name On Initialize Lock Disc ooff Finalize DVD RW Auto Init Optimize HDD
247. nect the printer and start the printing job again or select Yes to resume printing select No to cancel the print job See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of print errors ED Additional information Front panel displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning Message Explanation Action e E01 The HDD may be damaged or broken Please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs e E02 As the HDD info cannot be properly read no new recordings can be made Reinitializing the HDD page 148 may result in your being able to make recording again Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents including protected files Language code list Language Language code letter Language code Japanese ja 1001 English en 0514 French fr 0618 German de 0405 Italian it 0920 Spanish es 0519 Chinese zh 2608 Dutch nl 1412 Portuguese pt 1620 Swedish sv 1922 Russian ru 1821 Greek el 0512 Polish pl 1612 Czech cs 0319 orwegian no 1415 Afar aa 0101 Abkhazian ab 0102 Afrikaans af 0106 Amharic am 0113 Arabic ar 0118 Assamese as 0119 Aymara ay 0125 Azerbaijani az 0126 Bashkir ba 0201 Byelorussian be 0205 Bulgarian bg 0207 Bihari bh 0208 Bislama bi 0
248. ney OK MON 26 3 19 30 21 00 Pr6 Flower Until 20 4 MON FRI 13 30 14 00 Pr 8 New Input HDD Remain d i59h59m SP DVD Remainr 1 1h59m SP Each row is for one timer recording programme with the date and time information channel recording mode DVD or HDD and recording status The amount of free space available on the HDD and the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen In the upper right corner the number of timer programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms If there are more than five timer programmes already set press gt gt LCD page 7 to switch page go back using the ke button You can also delete a timer programme before it s started before the recorder enters timer recording standby by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR LCD page 2 See also Deleting a timer programme on page 89 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to change If you want to set a new timer programme select New Input and skip to step 4 3 Press then select Modify from the command menu panel Alternatively press ENTER The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which you can edit the settings Een 9 4 Enter the timer recording settings Use the amp buttons to select a field use the ft 4 buttons to change the value For more information on the options available at the Timer Programme
249. ng is set to On See Manual CH Setting on page 154 NTSC on PAL TV One NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL only TVs Off Use if your TV is already NTSC compatible Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off Check the operating instructions that came with your TV See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 161 for related information Audio In NICAM Select NICAM e Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast Regular Audio Record the non NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast You can still switch the audio to record using the Q button LCD page 3 before recording Analog Tuner Level Normal e Standard setting Compression Use if the audio level from the built in tuner is excessive causing distortion External Audio Stereo e Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack When the external audio is from the DV input an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or bilingual This has priority over the setting you make here Bilingual Recording A L e Record the left A channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On to DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW or in LPCM mode from an external source B R As above but for right B channel recording When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode
250. njoy the slideshow while playing back music in Jukebox Press to select the desired play list or Favourites that contains the songs you want to play back and then press ENTER For more information on adding music to the HDD see Using the Jukebox on page 134 You can also select a file or folder then press gt Play LCD page 7 to start playing the slideshow Use H to display the previous next picture or Il Pause LCD page 7 to pause the slideshow Depending on the aspect ratio some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom or left and right Large picture files may take a few seconds to display This is normal 4 C LCD page 1 Press to return to the thumbnail You can also use the RETURN button 5 Press to exit the PhotoViewer BP The PhotoViewer Zooming an image During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion ofthe picture by a factor of two or four You can also move the area of the picture displayed 1 Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture Repeated presses cycle between zoom off 2x zoom and 4x zoom The zoom factor is displayed on screen 2 Use to move the zoomed area Rotating an image You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow SO you can always view pictures the right way up whichever way they were taken LCD page 3 Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90 Press repeatedly to cont
251. now that other angles are available this can be switched off if you prefer see Angle Indicator on page 158 LCD page 3 Switch the camera angle e The angle number is displayed on screen e lf the disc was paused playback starts again with the new angle Displaying disc information on screen You can display various on screen information about the disc loaded or the HDD Disp LCD page 3 Display change the on screen information e Press once to show the HDD and removable disc DVD etc activity together Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback recording device HDD or removable disc e To hide the information display press DISP repeatedly until it disappears ND Cya SSS OS HDD and removable disc activity display Press DISP once to see the HDD and removable disc DVD etc activity Use the HDD DVD button LCD page 1 to switch between the two kinds of display The example displays below show high speed copying from HDD to DVD and HDD chase playback Rec Mode SP 2h00m DVD GB vvorwvideo Remain h m B Stop Hi Speed Copy HDD gt DVD TTT Oh08m left Remain 10h35m B Stop Rec Mode SP 2h00m DVD 9 ovo rw video Remain 0h52m m Stop Remain 10h35m gt Chase Play e Rec T Recording time Relative playback position Shows recording restrictions for the current channel programme E Stop ABC Pr1 DVD RW VR Resume Stereo Original XP 1h
252. ns While we recommend using an HDMI connection see page 13 you can also connect easily by using a SCART cable The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programmes and play discs Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page A Important e The AV1 RGB TV AV connector can output ordinary composite S Video or RGB video plus stereo analog audio The AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER connector accepts ordinary S Video and RGB video input as well as stereo analog audio See AV7 Out and AV2 L1 In on page 155 for how to setup these options e Before making or changing any rear panel connections make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet Recorder connections a Antenna cable TV wall outlet To antenna input From antenna output From SCART AV connector To recorder s antenna input To SCART AV connector TV 1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV See Connecting a TV antenna on page 6 for details f you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup connect it before the recorder i e between the antenna wall outlet and the antenna input on the recorder 2 Use a SCART cable not supplied to connect the AV1 RGB TV AV connector on this recorder to the SCART AV connector on your TV 3 Use another SCART cable to conn
253. ntry in the folder list Rowe Read next Bue Open device to view files Set AutoPlay defaults in Control Panel 8 2 SETUP Select Jukebox from the Home Menu folders from the connected USB device one 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files 99 o It takes several minutes to reload files Select Connect PC 4 Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel Note 1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Jukebox screen while the recorder is reloading files ED Using the Jukebox 5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the device If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes the import screen is automatically closed To reopen it you will have to repeat steps 2 through 4 Number of files unable to be copied Number of copied Status folders Connect PC aw Standby 00000 Folders 000 error 73 000000 Files 000 error Number of copied files 6 Open Windows Media Player 11 on the PC The device settings screen appears Click Cancel Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 11 the screen shown below may not be displayed r 3 wnao Mena fure Dres onte wee d Device Setup Peces HOOP eodem 0 whore lae yor deor oem MOOV A etm NOE eu Cc Pret pour Gevice eal De updatec ic o you POO Macks Prom rey h Be Vere fe mice osi Pee Ulett eren fe wet d bor ae ma cm j et Cancel From the PC in
254. o Logic Ill decoding page 32 4 Sound processing indicators Lights when any of the Loudness Midnight Quiet or tone controls feature is selected page 34 5 S RTRV Lights when Sound Retriever is active page 33 6 HDMI THROUGH Lights when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode 7 MCACC Lights when MCACC Effect is switched on page 34 Blinks during Auto MCACC Setup page 30 ooooooo MI RV MCACC 8 O OOoooooo Ooooooo Ooooooo ooooooo Ooooooo Ooooooo OOooooooO ooooooo Ooooooo ooooooo ooooooo ooooooo OooooooO ooooooo ooooooo ooooooo Ooooooo ooooooo jo UE ooooooo Ooooooo Ooooooo OooooooO oOoooooo Oooooooo ooooooo Oooooooo ooooooo OooooooO oOoooooo lt 8 e 8 Digital format indicators DO DIGITAL Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source page 31 DTS Lights during playback of a DTS source page 31 DTS 96 24 Lights during playback of a DTS 96 24 decoding page 31 DSD PCM Lights during DSD Direct Stream Digital to PCM conversion with SACDs PCM Lights during playback of PCM signals 9 Character display 10 Tuner indicators Y Lights when a broadcast is being received CD Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode O Lights when FM mono reception is selected o Lights when in one of the RDS display or search modes 11 9 Lights when sleep timer is active page 47 K Controls and
255. o start will not begin and no other operations are possible 1 There is a limit to the number of files amount of data that you can copy at one time Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD R RW BP The PhotoViewer Copying selected files to a DVD R RW This feature allows you just to copy some of the files stored on HDD to a DVD A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc asa Video mode title making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback Note however that you may need to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD player copying selected files doesn t automatically finalize the disc A Important e A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files If there are more files than this in the slideshow multiple slideshows are created on the disc f you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the slideshow will become unplayable but the free space will not increase 1 Loada blank or unfinalized Video mode DVD R or DVD RW disc eis 2 from Select View Edit Photos on the HDD menu ct gt D 3 e Select the file s or folder s you want to copy Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it ocopy multiple folders use the Multi Mode see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 1
256. o this Note AVR mode DVD R RW excluding DVD R DL disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing e DVD R DL Video mode discs and DVD R DL discs must be finalized in order to play in other recorders players Note however that some recorders players will not play even finalized dual layer discs 1 Load the disc you want to finalize Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding 2 Select Disc Setup from the Home Menu 3 Select Finalize gt Finalize gt Next Screen D Disc Setup Basic Finalize gt Next Screen Initialize Undo Finalize y Start Optimize HDD gt 4 For DVD R RW Video mode and DVD R RW discs only select a title menu style then select Yes to start finalization or No to cancel The menu you select will be the one that appears when the top menu or menu fora DVD R RW is selected on any DVD player QA Finalize Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR 1000 DVD recorder do not support this feature These discs will have only atext title menu when finalized on this recorder 1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder you will not be able to finalize the disc See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 161 for how to change the recorder s setting NE Ceos 0 5 The recorder will now st
257. ofer to use page 26 Use the remote within its operating range page 26 Replace the batteries page 26 All settings are reset e f the recorder is unplugged or there is a power failure while the recorder is on all the settings will be lost Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord No picture Check that everything is connected properly page 8 Check that the connected TV and or the AV amp receiver is set to the correct input e f you are using an indoor antenna that requires power make sure that Aerial Power in the Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto page 153 e f the aerial antenna is not connected properly or if it is shorted the Aerial Power setting will revert to Off automatically Check the aerial connection and try making the setting again No sound or sound is Make sure that the amp receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up distorted There is no sound when the picture is paused or during scanning or slow motion play Press gt Play LCD page 1 to resume regular playback e f the sound is distorted try cleaning the cable plugs Cannot switch a bilingual e During real time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels The main and sub programme channels are both output The picture from the e f the video signal from the external component is copy protected you cannot connect via external input is distorted this r
258. ogram and make sure it functions correctly before connecting the USB cable and attempting to use the Connect PC function For more information on Connect PC see Using a PC on page 67 You cannot edit or delete albums from this device when it is connected to a PC via USB If you wish to edit or delete albums via the Jukebox you must first Display the command menu disconnect the USB cable 1 Connect the PC via USB cable The screen below is displayed Press X to close the JE 2 WP Select Jukebox from the Home Menu UJ DOO Select Listen to Music from USB device 5 Select Edit from the menu SOR F Depending on the Windows OS version and the Windows Media Player settings the screen shown below 6 Select Copy all to HDD from the menu may not be displayed The folders on the USB device will be copied to the HDD Up to 99 folders 999 files on the USB device can be T copied displayed e Only the files that have been read can be copied To dj AutoPlay copy the files that have not been read reload the files see below w Pioneer HDD DVD Recorder o copy specific folders select the desired folders and select Copy to HDD 7 Always do this for this device Device options Reloading files from a USB device If you have a USB device with more than 1000 files and or 100 folders you can still view all the tracks using the reload function 1 Navigate to the last e
259. ol When watching Dolby Digital or DIS material at low volume low level sounds including some of the dialog can be difficult to hear properly Using one of the Dynamic Range Control DRC settings can help by bringing up the low level sounds while controlling high level peaks Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks gt 1 Open the Sound Setup menu gt Select D R C then press ENTER 3 Select a setting Select one of the following D R C Auto Only available for Dolby TrueHD signals Select D R C High or D R C Mid for signals other than Dolby TrueHD e D R C High Dynamic range is reduced loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased D R C Mid Mid setting D R C Off No dynamic range adjustment use when listening at higher volume 4 Press to exit 2 Note Dual mono setting Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD RW discs recorded with bilingual audio gt 1 Open the Sound Setup menu gt Select Dual Mono then press ENTER 3 Select a setting Select one of the following 2 CH1 Mono Only channel 1 is played CH2 Mono Only channel 2 is played CH1 CH2 Both channels are played through the front speakers 4 Press to exit 1 This s
260. ol compatible Pioneer plasma television Off Disable the HDMI Control function Select this option when not connected to an HDMI Control compatible component or when connected to a component manufactured by a company other than Pioneer For more information about HDMI Control see HDMI Control on page 66 his setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device For more information see Troubleshooting on page 168 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Options On Screen Display One The recorder displays operation displays Stop Play etc on screen Off Switches off the on screen operation displays Front Panel Display One The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby Off The front panel display is switched off in standby SS AN Link This Recorder Only Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are not passed through to the AV output Pass Through Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for connected devices Note that during EPG data download the EPG data is not passed through When set to Pass Through make sure to set Power Save page 152 to Off DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder s DivX registration code See DivX video compatibility and DivX VOD content on page 60 Set Preview Quick Preview When in the Disc Navigator the thumbnail video play
261. ompatibility on page 60 he thumbnail of files that cannot be played is displayed as the A logo 1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable but if there are more files folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 142 The PhotoViewer Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer You can choose to display photos by grouping them by folder file or number of thumbnails 1 Display the view options panel The view options panel toViewer HDD 77 Folder2 File Folder Size 999 MB r Style 12 Files 2 Choose Display Mode or Style then press ENTER to see the available view options Display Mode Choose between folder and file display modes e Style Choose between displays of 1 4 and 12 thumbnails 3 Choose a view option then press ENTER The display mode will change to that which you have chosen Playing a slideshow 1 Select a folder from the folder list To startthe slideshow from the first file in the folder skip to step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing gt 2 Select a thumbnail Use I 1 LCD page 7 to display the previous next page of thumbnails ae omen gt 3 Select Start Slideshow or Start Audio Slideshow from the menu When Start Audio Slideshow is selected you can e
262. on Unlock The padlock icon above the video window becomes unlocked It remains unlocked for the remainder of your current TV viewing session If you want to lock the video window again follow the same procedure The RED Action button will now act as Lock Channel mosaic screen You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid Area Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button Select the channel icon you want using the cursor buttons then press ENTER to return to the previous screen on that channel Areas The GUIDE Plus system consists of seven Areas All Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar e Grid The GUIDE Plus system Home Area Displays TV listings information for the next seven days by time and channel e Search Search for TV programmes by category e g Sport subcategory e g Football or keyword e My TV Set up a profile and receive recommendations according to your preferences Schedule Show all scheduled recordings Info Area for additional information such as weather not available in all regions Editor Change channel settings Setup Setup the GUIDE Plus system kA Note The Grid Area The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE Plus system and is the first screen that you see when you press GUIDE You can see IV listings for the next seven days starting with the current day When
263. on this Only one instance of a copy once protected title can be added to the Copy List and after it s been copied the title is erased from the HDD it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy once protected You can identify copy once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on screen If the current title is copy once protected an exclamation mark 1 is shown Copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners One Touch Copy See also Copyright above The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing or selected in the Disc Navigator HDD title to DVD or DVD title to HDD The whole title is copied regardless of where in the title you start the copy HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording mode When copying DVD to HDD the copy is made in whatever recording mode is currently set Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when trying to copy from the HDD 1 LCD page 1 If you re copying from DVD to the HDD select a recording mode Note that selecting a recording mode higherthan the title playing will not result in a better quality recording 2 LCD page 3 P
264. or VR mode recording DVD RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording DVD R discs do not require initializing A Important e The table below shows the maximum number of titles recordable per disc and the maximum number of chapters per title Max titles Max chapters Disc type rec format per disc per title DVD R RW 99 99 Video mode DVD R RW RAM 99 9997 VR mode DVD R RW AQ 99 1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc 2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc his recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD R RW Video mode and DVD R discs recorded on another recorder DVD RW discs recorded on another recorder are playable on this recorder but are not recordable e The maximum continuous recording time for one title is eight hours when using a DVD R RW disc Note f you delete a title from a DVD R RW disc the total number of recordable titles remaining may not increase Although this recorder can record PAL SECAM NTSC and PAL 60 you can t mix multiple TV line systems on one disc A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings or NISC and PAL 60 See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 161 Fingerprints dirt and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and or recording performance Please take proper care of your discs Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts defective discs
265. or optimum sound 31 Zute Disteninga miele es mae 666686 6222860500884 31 Listening in surround sound llle 31 Dolby Pro Logic Il Music settings 32 Center image SOLUIT s va se EE RPRRRRRPFRES 32 Using Advanced Surround seen 32 Using Front Stage Surround Advance 33 Listening IN SteIBO ses sse n3 59s SpEEEEREEERIdE 33 Genre Syne MOUBS scu ara a Aa Decree 38 87 33 Using i ie Sound Retriever La acsi s cce ECC RC e 33 Listening with MCACC Effect sese 34 Using Midnight Loudness and Quiet listening modes secus kk rr rA A 34 Adjusting the bass and Tele sce acc hee 34 Adjusting sound delay ccccceneen nena nnn 34 07 Listening to the radio Listening TONE T4010 exse hee ceeeecegececean ed 35 Improving poor FM receptio is scs i eiiie 35 Improving poor AM sound le 35 Changing the noise eut mode ssa ccacacacacackoa s 35 MEMONZING SEREIDITSS seansanna rripat EERE RR 35 Listening to station presets 36 Using boe T TT TPTT 36 Displaying RDS IDTOrmialloliass a aan uc mes 36 Searching for RDS DFOU OITIS s acucxcx cw sasssa 36 08 Surround sound settings Using the Sound Setup mend sx box chau e eww es 37 Channel level setting llle 37 Speaker distance SSUING 4 0260 dc aqaa 37 Dynamic Range ODDO asc arena RR 38 DUSILINGNG Setting ss 99 wsckce e EE HERE dE a x du 38 Using the Virtual Surround Back mode 39 EFE ABODIUSIO 5 RC
266. or to your TV Recorder connections Connecting an external decoder box 2 If you only have a decoder connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page Using the setup on this page you can Record scrambled channels received using the recorder s built in analog TV tuner A Important Do not connect this recorder through your VCR satellite receiver or cable box Always connect each component directly to your TV or other AV component Decoder From SCART AV connector To SCART AV connector IQQ Q TV 1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 for details 2 Use a SCART cable not supplied to connect the AV 1 RGB TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV This enables you to watch discs 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box This enables you to record scrambled TV channels Note Connecting using HDMI Connect the receiver subwoofer to this recorder using the supplied HDMI cable see page 13 for details The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video as well as almost every kind of digital audio When connected to an HDMI component or HDCP compatible DVI component the HDMI indicator lights HDMI setup is generally automatic There are however settings yo
267. order may not operate properly Connecting up Cam Back of display unit f ioneer DISPLAY UNIT SYSTEM iPod V ETT 1 SYSTEM connector Connect to the receiver subwoofer g HDD DVD Recorder Rear panel Rear panel eme DB gt 1 ANTENNA IN RF IN OUT Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN RF IN jack The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV 2 AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER AV connector Audio video input output SCART type AV connector for connecting to a VCR or other equipment with a SCART connector The input accepts video S Video and RGB See AV2 L1 In on page 155 for how to set this up 3 AV1 RGB TV AV connector Audio video output SCART type AV connector for connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART connector The video output is switchable between video S Video and RGB See AV Out on page 154 for how to set this up 4 G LINK Use to connect the supplied G LINK cable to enable GUIDE Plus to control an external satellite receiver etc 5 CONTROL IN Connect to the CONTROL OUT 1 jack of the receiver subwoofer HDMI OUT COAXIAL 2 F AUDIO input To listen to audio from an external component connect with a stereo mini plug cable Once connected the input automatically changes to Front Audio In 3 iPod input terminal Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source When you connect an iPod
268. order is in standby to switch on and immediately start recording When set to Recorder s Tuner it is not possible to use the Pause Live TV feature from standby After pressing P LIVE TV it will take at least 10 seconds for the picture to change during this time all controls except the power button are inoperative Note that startup trom standby is not possible if you have selected Recorder s Tuner in Pause Live TV on page 160 Please note that you can t record from another component VCR etc that is connected by a SCART cable to the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER connector using the Pause Live TV feature Condition TV built in analog tuner TV Pause Live TV TV built in digital tuner TV External input of TV TV DVR built in analog tuner DVD DVR built in Pause Live TV analog tuner DVR built in digital tuner DVD DVR built in Pause Live TV digital tuner Preset channel of DVR and TV are matched after downloading from TV Direct TV recording Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched after downloading from TV Record TV programme that you re watching Direct TV recording 7 Preset channel info in D TV cannot be shared by DVR even after Download from TV Record TV programme that you re watching Direct TV recording Record TV programme that you re watching 1 No Chase Play Warning if you change input this will stop the recording NE Rod
269. order s connector antenna input To SCART AV connector TV 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 for more on RF antenna connections including from this recorder to your TV 02 Recorder connections 2 Use a SCART cable not supplied to connect the AV1 RGB TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV This enables you to watch discs 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2 INPUT 1 DECODER AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your cable box satellite receiver This enables you to record scrambled TV channels 4 Plug the supplied G LINK cable to the G LINK jack This enables you to control the tuner in the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus 9 system Position the IR transmitter end of the G LINK cable so that the IR receiver on your cable satellite receiver will pick up the control signals see diagram gj See the manual that came with your cable satellite receiver if you re not sure where the IR receiver is on the front panel Alternatively experiment with the remote control operating it from very close range until you find the place where the receiver responds Ky tip his recorder has a through function which allows you to record a TV programme from the built in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR To use this feature when the re
270. ot recommend using them since some may damage the lens Cleaning the recorder s exterior When cleaning the glossy surface of the cabinet gently wipe it with the provided cleaning cloth If you use a dusty or hard cloth or if you rub the cabinet hard the surface of the product will be scratched If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth water droplets on the surface may enter into the product resulting in malfunction Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside or if the temperature of the room rises quickly Although the condensation won t damage the recorder it may temporarily impair its performance For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using Additional information m Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this recorder for years to come so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it Do Use in a well ventilated room Place on a solid flat level surface such as a table shelf or stereo rack Don t X Usein a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity including near radiators and other heat generating appliances X Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight X Usein a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be expose
271. ou only want to edit the recording quality frequency destination timing or genre settings skip to step 5 below 2 Press the GREEN Action button Edit amet 3 Use the cursor and number buttons LCD Page 2 to edit the recording date start time end time and channel Please enter the recording date and press the Green button 34 to confirm 25 May Grid Search MyTV Schedule Recording Schedule Qual Freq Dest 25 May Friends SP Once HDD Welcome to GUIDE Plus Cant One Button Recording Use the f 4 amp buttons or the number buttons to edit aug Note Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue or the RED Action button to go back 4 Enter a name for the scheduled recording Please press 9 w or 4 to highlight a character on the keyboard Select with ENTER Wi Press the Green button to confirm Please enter your event s title name Friendsl Welcome to GUIDE Plus Sait One Button Recording aet Use the T buttons followed by ENTER to select characters from the on screen keyboard After entering the whole name press the GREEN Action button to continue 5 Highlight the right recording tile 6 Press the RED Action button Quality to change the recording quality BBC2 25 May 10 10 RUUEMEJTTUTTSE ay i Recording Quality LP Recording Frequency Once Recording Destination HDD Timers set 1 32 VPS PDC 0 8 Press gt to disp
272. ound the receiver subwoofer sound is output with the Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model POWER ON indicator Blue Try reducing the volume level and the HDMI indicator Red If the problem persists take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your lit up dealer for servicing Do not block the air intake opening on the bottom as well as the air exhaust opening on the back of this unit Additional information am Problem Remedy No sound is output when an When playing back a source on the supplied HDD DVD recorder make sure that the input function is selected settings for Audio Out page 155 and the HDMI Output under Audio Output Setting page 159 are all at their default values f you re using the line input make sure the component is connected correctly and the volume level of your external component i e a portable player etc is adjusted see Connecting auxiliary components on page 40 Turn up the volume e No audio is output from the speakers connected to this unit if HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode page 43 e No audio is output if a DVI component is connected via HDMI Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off No sound from surround Refer to Channel level setting on page 37 to check the speaker levels speaker e Check that you haven t selected the Stereo mode see Listening in surround sound on page 31 Connect the speak
273. ource to the HDMI input of this unit Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors HDMI Control compatible Pioneer plasma television HDMI input HDMI cable Receiver subwoofer HDMI output HDMI cable Other amps or AV converter A Important When connecting this system or changing connections be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket After completing all connections connect the power cords to the wall socket After connecting this unit to an AC outlet a 15 second initialization process begins You cannot carry out any operations during initialization The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking To get the most out of this function we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a plasma television but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this unit Setting the HDMI options You must adjust the settings of this unit as well as HDMI Control compatible connected components in order to make use of the HDMI Control function For more information see the operating instructions for each component Setting the HDMI Control mode Choose whether to set this unit s HDMI Control function On or Off You will need to set it to Control On to use the HDMI Control function e When using a
274. peakers The LFE is not limited when set to OdB which is the recommended value When set to 5dB 10dB 15dB or 20dB the LFE is limited by the respective degree When Off is selected no sound is output from the LFE channel caer gt 1 Open the Sound Setup menu e ee o 2 Select LFE ATT then press ENTER 4 3 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm P Note Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone If you prefer you can set the channel levels using a test tone as a reference rather than playing a source see Channel level setting on page 37 A test tone is played through each speaker in turn allowing you to adjust the level as it plays You can also adjust the channel levels for surround sound using test tone 1 Carry out tone testing The test tone is output from each speaker in turn Adjust the volume level below 50 2 Adjust the channel level of a tune while it is playing The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker You can adjust the level of each channel by 10 dB You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output using the VOL buttons this does not affect the channel level settings Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer produces it may sound quieter than it really is We suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening to a source See the method described in Chann
275. programme is not broadcast for over 13 weeks its settings are automatically deleted No Broadcast UK only Displays when a programme for which you had the EPG Link set to On does not record because the date of the scheduled recording has already passed nothing displayed Another timer recording or copying is in progress 6 Press to exit the timer recording screen Using the digital electronic programme guide CH Note f you set a DVD timer recording but there is no recordable DVD disc loaded or the disc loaded doesn t have enough free space for the complete recording Recovery is shown In this case unless you load a Suitable disc before the recording actually starts the recorder will use the HDD for recording The message Can t Rec will appear if there are already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough free space on the HDD for recording When you have EPG Link or Series Recording set to On any changes in broadcast time or division of broadcasts are automatically accommodated for and your scheduled recordings are carried out without any additional settings As a result even when you have not scheduled programmes to record at the same time changes in broadcasting schedules can cause scheduled recordings to overlap Deleting a timer programme You can delete timer programmes you no longer need 1 Press TIMER REC LCD page 7 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to erase 4 g
276. r Russian Federation 1821 ru Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16 9 4 3 Letter Box The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen The sides of the programme are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen 4 3 4 3 Letter Box The programme is presented correctly on either setting 4 3 Pan amp Scan When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16 9 16 9 The programme is presented in widescreen 16 9 Your TV will determine how the picture is presented check the manual that came with the TV for details ED Additional information Handling discs When holding discs of any type take care not to leave fingerprints dirt or scratches on the disc surface Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc Although not as fragile as the recorded side scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable Should a disc become marked with fingerprints dust etc clean using a soft dry cloth wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge Do not wipe with a circular motion If necessary use a cloth soaked in alcohol or a commercially available CD DVD cleaning kit to
277. r of tracks allowed in Jukebox is 50 000 Note that when there are many tracks contained in one album it may take time to display and transfer these tracks Artists albums and tracks with no set name that are transferred from CD DVD USB are displayed as Unknown Artist Unknown Album and Unknown File in Windows Media Player 11 Artists albums and track names that do not conform to the ISO8859 1 standard may display differently in Windows Media Player 11 and the Jukebox File whose extensions are not supported by the Jukebox i e files that are not mp3 or wma cannot be transferred Files imported tothis recorder via Connect PC cannot be exported from this recorder Note that no recording functions including timer recordings will be carried out when you are using the Connect PC function Playing music from the Jukebox You can select artists albums or individual tracks from the Jukebox to play 1 Select Jukebox from the Home Menu Select a Jukebox option e Listen to Music Edit Listen to CDs or WMA MP3 files that have been copied to the HDD You can also access this option directly by pressing JUKEBOX LCD page f Listen to Music from USB device Listen to music from an external USB device Proceed to step 4 Select the artist you want to play back The screen below shows artists stored on the HDD Jukebox HDD Artist List ALL 2 Artist2 4 39 Artist3 4 Artist4 5 Art
278. racy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use the high speed copy function to make a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise The edit point you choose will only be accurate to within one half to one second On the other hand these edit points will be preserved if you use high speed copy to make a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW HDD genres The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder To help you organize your HDD video content you can assign different genres to titles There are 20 genres in total including five user definable ones that you can name as you like Create DVD VR DVD RAM Pjay List only Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it Before you can use this command make sure that the Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the left 1 Select Create from the command menu panel Gd Disc Navigator DVD dues Vo title 4 Titles aro Play List ss g Undo or Mode Remain 0h30m Select an original title to add to the Play List Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as necessary to the Play List Play DVD Video DVD VR DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM HDD Use this function to start playback of a title 1 Highlight the title you want to play Note gt 2 Select Play from the command menu panel Play
279. rating another connected component via this remote control HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 Switch input from HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 To operate the HDD DVD recorder press the button for the connected input then press the HDD DVR button on the LCD touch screen TV Switches to the input selected at TV Input setup page 46 FM AM page 35 Switches between FM and AM bands LINE page 41 Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver subwoofer s audio inputs Digital 1 Digital 2 Analog iPod or Front Audio In 5 LCD touch screen Displays the buttons used to control external components such as a receiver subwoofer HDD DVD recorder plasma television Blu ray disc player and DVD player The current operating mode is displayed at the top of the remote control s screen Although the LCD touch screen disappears if you do not perform any operations for a while it appears when the screen is touched or a button on the remote control is pressed 6 Other component button Use to operate an HDD DVD recorder or other connected component 7 T1 4 cursor buttons and ENTER Use to control receiver functions 8 SETUP Use to access the menu system for surround sound setup tuner settings and so on page 35 37 44 47 9 RETURN Use to cancel settings Controls and displays CH 10 RCV Use to switch to the receiver subwoofer operating mode when this unit is in the other operating modes Press again to return to the previous op
280. ratories Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS The DTS technologies are explained below See www dtstech com for more detailed information S dts up Master Audio 11 Additional information DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a 5 1 channel audio coding system from DTS Inc now widely used for DVD Video DVD Audio 5 1 music discs digital broadcasts and video games It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels comprising five full range channels including an LFE channel Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of a low compression rate and high rates of transmittance during playback DTS ES DTS ES the ES stands for Extended Surround is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS ES Discrete 6 1 and DTS ES Matrix 6 1 encoded sources DTS ES Discrete 6 1 gives true 6 1 channel sound with a completely separate discrete surround back channel DTS ES Matrix 6 1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround left right channels Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5 1 channel decoder DTS Neo 6 DTS Neo 6 can generate 6 1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source Such as video or TV and from 5 1 channel sources It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source as well as its own processing to determine channel localization with two channel sources the 1
281. re are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone RECEIVER 3 If the receiver subwoofer is off press RECEIVER to turn the power on 4 Ww Press MCACC Tryto be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC The volume increases automatically and the system outputs a series of test tones e To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished press MCACC The unit will continue to use the previous settings If the ambient noise level is too high Noisy blinks in the display for five seconds To exit and check the noise levels press MCACC or to try again press ENTER when Retry shows in the display If you see an Error MIC or Error Speaker message in the display there may be a problem with your mic or the speaker connections To try again press ENTERS When the MCACC setup is complete the volume level returns to normal Complete shows in the display and MCACC Effect is activated Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this unit upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup 1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout 2 e If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup too much ambient noise echo off the walls obstacles blocking the speak ers from the microphone the final settings may be incorrect Check for household appliances air conditioner fridge fan etc that may be affecting the environment and swi
282. re coloured in accordance with the following code Blue Neutral Brown Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter Lor coloured RED How to replace the fuse Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse D3 4 2 1 2 2_B_En Contents amp Section One Wie AOS Ck winder eee E yes yaaa 5 01 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when Setting up 6 Home theater sound SetUp e ura ari n c 6 Slander SUMOUNO SEL acc uoa alca talc itii dr 6 Front surround SEUD s aue do enint ankka adada 6 Preparing the speakers leeren 6 Using the supplied speaker bases 6 When not using the supplied speaker bases 7 Connect the speaker system ell 7 Additional notes on speaker placement 7 02 Connecting up Receiver SUDWOOIE aas noxa s CERRAR RR RR 8 Real ocn PEEERR TETTE TT T DT TT T 8 Side panel risu e ek kaa eek Ea a aadd ddai 8 Back or display U0 o20066eteeeGeeeeaadecanaaa 9 IBD AD VI ROSDEOBE a a rd St a ee Ge oe gigs 9 Ri cM IA l adai a TITIO 9 FON OaE attic tve
283. re sophisticated copying tasks you can build a Copy List of titles to copy and edit titles so that you only copy the bits you want See Using Copy Lists on page 128 for detailed instructions Where possible the recorder will copy your recordings at high speed Depending on the recording mode the kind of disc loaded and various other factors copying can be as fast as one minute per hour of video See Minimum copying times on page 163 for more on copying times If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a lower recording quality for example an XP recording on the HDD copied to SP on a DVD Copying in this way is always done in real time When real time copying from the HDD to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW the chapter markers in the original material are not copied Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals according to the Auto Chapter settings see also Auto Chapter Video on page 157 and Auto Chapter DVD 4 R RW on page 158 Restrictions on copying Commercial DVD Video discs are protected using Copy Guard These discs cannot be copied to the HDD Some video material is copy once protected This means that it can be recorded to HDD but it can t then be freely copied again If you want to transfer copy once protected material from HDD to DVD you ll need to a CPRM ver 1 1 or higher VR mode DVD RW ver 2 0 or 2 1 VR mode DVD R or CPRM compatible DVD RAM disc see CPRM on page 92 for more
284. record the programme to the HDD for you This recorder is compatible with VPS Video Programming System and PDC Programme Delivery Control systems used by many analog TV stations to ensure that a timer recording catches the whole programme even when the programme is not running to schedule Up to eight timer programmes can be set with VPS PDC on A Important Atimer recording can t be set if there are already 32 timer programmes waiting to be recorded Timer recording will not start if he recorder is already recording A disc is being initialized finalized or unfinalized imer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished When the front panel display is set to ON the timer indicator lights in the front panel display when the timer is active If the indicator is blinking it means that for a DVD timer recording there is no disc loaded or the disc loaded is not recordable for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is setto start the recorder will go into timer recording standby In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours However because one title HDD is limited to 12 hours recordings over 12 hours will be spread over two titles Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds b
285. recording to the HDD it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record page 161 he power may have failed during recording Timer programme doesn t When setting the recording channel make sure you set the recorder s built in TV tuner not record successfully the TV s built in tuner When recording to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW programmes that are copy once protected cannot be recorded Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy once material page 92 e Two timer programmes may have overlapped in which case only the earlier one will record completely he power may have failed during recording Additional information m Problem Remedy After briefly unplugging A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset or after a power failure when there is no power to the recorder After unplugging or a power failure the battery keeps the front panel display all settings for a period of several minutes Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use shows the recorder again o have the battery replaced please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs Front panel display shows The child lock is on turn off in order to use the recorder page 99 LOCKED when a button is pressed Can t use One Touch Copy Make sure that there is a recordable DVD R
286. ress during playback to copy the current title The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied e High speed copying is used when copying from the HDD to DVD Playback continues while copying Real time copying is used when copying from DVD to the HDD Playback restarts from the beginning of the title EO Copying and backup Cancelling One Touch Copy You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it s started Press and hold for more than a second Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is erased f you cancel a HDD to DVD R R copy the space available for recording does not return to the pre copy figure Notes on copying using One Touch Copy Copying to DVD itle name chapter markers as well as thumbnail picture markers for the Disc Navigator are also copied However if you copy to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW only the first 40 characters of a name are copied The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW e You can t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy once protected A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can t be copied to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW Use a DVD R RW VR mode or DVD RAM disc for this type of material Low resolution SEP through LP modes widescreen material can t be copied to a DVD R
287. reverse lle 109 The Play Mode ieri ua 4446806008 64a enacad 109 Displaying and switching subtitles 2er s 111 Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks 111 Switching audio channelS s acea cc cacacacacacs 111 Switching camera angles lr 112 Displaying disc information on screen 112 08 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder Playing trom a DV camcorder sacs bec erick mna 114 Recording from a DV camcorder 114 EOUDE Lus ct ak ee eek CRS WOO OR OE RR SS 116 09 Editing ECMO ORONS ic2cccceGeeeee ds eeeaeaaeas 117 The Disc Navigator screen ee ee eee ees 118 10 Copying and backup FCU DEOR I aca aca La RR CROP CREE QC CC CE daa 127 One Tolg CODY wx 9A 1 RIIAIGSqGaGdqeqed ees 127 Using Copy LISTS 4 www aaar 128 Using dise DOCET ascen err eee ee ae om dod 132 11 Using the Jukebox Copying music to the HDD se sors ER EE 134 Copying files Vie DB acce i vete e acie c cc ae acce 135 Playing music from the Jukebox sua cua ca a ct 137 Changing the display style of the Jukebox 139 Coping alb ES EOS aa a acie eee CE RU eee ae 139 Editing the HDD JukeboX 5s ss o os 139 12 The PhotoViewer Locating JPEG picture TIIBS 55 5 Res 140 Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer 141 Playing a slideshiW ss es wwe x ERREUR R EAR 141 Reloading files from a disc or USB device 142 Importing files to the HDI ss uis den e 142 Selecting multiple files orfolders 143
288. rocess again Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus screen e Press f to highlight the Menu bar then use gt to reach the Setup area and select Setup Continue setting up from the start of this step again If your external receiver still doesn t respond to the G LINK controller please call customer support and report the brand and model of your external receiver See also GU DE Plus FAQ and troubleshooting on page 83 5 Identify the Host Channel for your country The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus system is distributed throughout Europe by selected broadcasters called Host Channels It is important that the host analog channel for your country is correctly identified in order to receive listings information EPG download Follow A B or C below depending on your setup A f you are not using an external receiver this recorder will automatically scan all channels for the Host Channel eave the recorder in standby overnight do not leave it switched on B f you are using an external receiver you need to identify the Host Channel from the table below Country Host Region Channels Comment Austria Eurosport Belgium RIL TVI France Canal Analog only Germany Eurosport Italy TV Analog only Netherlands Eurosport Spain Tele 5 Analog only Switzerland Eurosport UK ITV Eurosport ITV is analog only Use Eurosport if you are a SK
289. rrect channel and start recording You can also use the 6 REC button LCD page 1 to set the recording You can review the shows you have set to record in the Schedule Area see also The Schedule Area on page 79 Lock Unlock video window When you enter the GUIDE Plus system the channel you were watching remains visible in the video window The date stamp above the window lets you know the channel date and time The default setting for this window is locked as indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video window When locked the video window always shows the channel you were previously watching as you move up and down through the listings grid If you prefer you can unlock the video window so that as you highlight different channels in the listings grid that channel is shown in the video window 1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the programme broadcast schedules 04 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide 1 Highlight a channel logo Welcome to GUIDE Plus Two Thrisa Friends gt itv 1 This Alias The gt Gane Sally Jessy Raph Our b Go five Armageddon gt sxvlone News at Ten The Secret it v 2 Football amet Emmerdale Homes Polic gt One Button Recording Channel logos are displayed to the left of programme titles 2 Press the RED Action butt
290. rs DTV set top boxes and other AV devices HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP as well as Digital Visual Interface DVI in one specification HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI compliant displays HDMI has the capability to support standard enhanced or high definition video plus standard to multi channel surround sound audio HDMI features include uncom pressed digital video a bandwidth of up to 2 2 gigabytes per second with HDTV signals one connector instead of several cables and connectors and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DIVs HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC Chapter 10 HDMI Control By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control compatible Pioneer plasma television or the HDD DVD recorder with an HDMI cable you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected plasma television as well as have the connected plasma television automatically change inputs in response to operations carried out on this unit Refer to the operating instructions for your plasma television for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable You cannot use this function with components that do not support HDMI Control We cannot guarantee this unit wil
291. s The supplied speaker bases come in two different shapes You can determine the correct base for a speaker by checking if the screw s location lines up correctly when the speaker is placed atop the base There are specific bases for the front center L and surround speaker R and for the front center R and surround speaker L with two of each type included Speaker E Screw om 2 2 S d Speaker base When not using the supplied speaker bases e Attach the non skid pads to the base of each of the front center and surround speakers as shown Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base of each speaker Non skid pads x 16 Front center and surround speakers Connect the speaker system Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly After connecting everything place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound After placing the speakers run the Auto MCACC setup page 30 to complete your surround sound setup Additional notes on speaker placement Install the main front left and right speakers at an equal distance from the TV When using the Standard surround setup install the surround speakers slightly above ear level for optimum effect When using the Front surround setup separate the left and right speakers by about 1 5 m for optimum effect Precautions Do not place the speaker on an unstable
292. s While a PBC menu screen is displayed use to select numbered menu items LCD page 3 Video CD in non PBC mode only EMSS Ed Commercial back skip LCD page 7 Each press skips backward forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction m While paused press and hold to start dad Slow motion playback Press repeatedly to LCD page 1 change the playback speed forward only While paused press to advance a single frame forward only return Press to display the disc menu of a Video CD Super VCD playing in PBC mode Note 1 When playing in PBC mode some playback features such as search repeat and programme play are not available You can play a PBC Video CD Super VCD in non PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator see Using the Disc Navigator with playback only discs on page 107 ND Cya SSS OS Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM HDD You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video on recordable DVDs and the HDD and to view information on titles See also Editing on page 117 for more on editing recordable discs 1 LCD page 1 Select the HDD or DVD 2 NAVIGATOR Open the Disc Navigator 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr2 SP 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP 1h00m 1 0G a Disc Navigator HDD 3 10Titles LEI z 4 Titles i i 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr9 SP a s20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr9 SP E R
293. s ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins ins 352 x 240 352 x 288 352 x 480 352 x 576 480 x 480 480 x 576 544 x 480 544 x 576 120 x 480 120 x 576 i Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes 352 x 240 352 x 288 352 x 480 352 x 576 120 x 480 120 x 576 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System the second when set to 625 System 55 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD R RW 4 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high speed copied to DVD R RW 5 XP mode is available for HDD recordings only If set for a DVD recording the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode e Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality e Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format except for LPCM mode which is in Linear PCM format e See also Recording on page 97 Additional information m Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction If you think there is something wrong with this component please checkthe points below Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service cen
294. s ENTER to add Titles you ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink 5 Select Next from the command menu panel to proceed to the title edit screen Note 1 When copying to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original 2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High Speed Copy for copying to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW the chapter markers of the original are not copied Chap 4 6 Select a title to edit A menu appears of Copy List editing commands e Erase Erase individual titles from the Copy List see Erase on page 119 Move Change the order of titles in the Copy List see Move on page 124 Preview Check the content of a title in the Copy List Cancel Exit the menu Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing 7 Select Next from the command menu panel to proceed to the copy options screen e Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality see Recording Mode below 8 Select Start Copy to start copying Recording Mode 1 Select Recording Mode from the command menu panel 2 Select a recording mode for the copy High Speed Copy The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original e XP SP LP EP SLP SEP MN The Copy List is copied at the specifie
295. s are supplied or sold by Pioneer Inserting a CA module The Common Interface card slot is located on the inside of the cover of the recorder s front panel 1 Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the Common Interface ea II a 2 Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as it will go ES Q j The Common Interface card slot accepts Type and Type Il PC Cards PCMCIA cards K Controls and displays Remote control e For more information on using the remote control see Operating the remote control on page 28 Operating the receiver subwoofer This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver subwoofer Note that the controls change when you have chosen the input function for separate connected devices such as an HDD DVD recorder RECEIVER JL Um Co orn a Li m mmmmm m m m mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm eee eee eee eee eee eee ummmmmmmm PLIN I PN sane o gt T RECEIVER 1 RECEIVER Switches the receiver subwoofer to On Standby 2 OTV Switches the TV to On Standby TV CTRL Switches the remote control to the TV operating mode no effect on the current input source of this unit 3 SOURCE Switches the power for the selected component to On Standby page 28 4 Input select buttons Change the input for this unit You will also need to press one of these buttons when ope
296. s cannot be copied at high speed for any types of e XP titles DV D EO Copying and backup 8 To edit a title highlight it using the buttons then press ENTER Copy HDD DVD Video mod Title Edit 1 20 00 Wed29 03 Pr 2 t 2 20 00 Wed22 03 Pr2 Title Name Erase Section Move Preview Back Next Cancel Eg Wed29 03 Pr2 SP Zt 1h00m 2 0G Copy List Total Current DVD Remain 4 38 Cd 4 38 L 1 A menu of editing commands appears Erase Erase individual titles from the Copy List see Erase on page 119 Title Name Name or rename a title in the Copy List see Title Name on page 120 Erase Section Erase part of a title see Erase Section on page 121 Move Change the order of titles in the Copy List see Move on page 124 Preview Check the content of a title in the Copy List Divide Divide a title in the Copy List into two see Divide on page 122 Combine Combine two titles in the Copy List into one see Combine on page 125 Chapter Edit Edit chapters within a Copy List title see Chapter Edit on page 122 Divide Divide a chapter into two Erase Move Erase a chapter Change the chapter order Combine Combine two chapters into one Set Thumbnail Set the thumbnail frame for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 121 Recording Mode Set the picture quality of the copy
297. s in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD ROM drive It is also possible to finalize DVD RW discs This is only necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu for the disc See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 101 for detailed instructions Undo Finalize DVD RW You can undo the finalization on DVD RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded Undo the finalization is displayed use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder 1 Select Disc Setup from the Home Menu 2 Select Finalize gt Undo Finalize then Start Optimize HDD HDD As you record erase and edit recordings the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented Periodically the HDD will need optimizing to clean up all the fragmented Tiles When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will automatically display a message recommending optimization A Important Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours During optimization playback and recording are not possible e Cancelling optimization mid way does not undo the optimization a
298. s short excerpts from HDD only throughout the selected title Note that edited titles that will play normally from the beginning Normal The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title Cl Information Next Screen This option displays a menu of Cl card functions Consult your service provider for more information on the functions available Software Update Next Screen The Software Update function can check for and download updated system software for the digital tuner See Using Software Update Digital tuner on page 162 Options 2 USB Restart USB Device f the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder try using this option to restart it If the device still does not work properly try switching it off then back on and or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable Confirm Printer Use this option to confirm the make and model of the printer connected to the recorder does not work with all printers Pause Live TV TV s Tuner Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link compatible TV connected by SCART cable Recorder s Tuner e Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder s internal TV tuner See also Pause Live TV on page 96 for more information on this setting HDD Sleep Mode Proceed Puts the HDD to sleep Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows you to reduce noise produced by the unit resulting in improved sound quality When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to loa
299. s you want them see Audio In on page 155 e ftheaspect ratio is distorted squashed or stretched adjust on the source component or your TV before recording To watch video coming in via the DV input front panel select DV gt DV Video Playback from the Home Menu see also Playing from a DV camcorder on page 114 3 LCD page 1 Set the recording quality See Setting the picture quality recording time on page 95 for detailed information 4 OA Select the HDD or DVD for recording 5 Press to start recording If your source is copy protected using Copy Guard you will not be able to record it See Restrictions on video recording on page 92 for more details 1 You can t start playback immediately after recording starts Simultaneous playback and recording doesn t work while copying or backing up 2 his cannot be selected if AV2 L1 In is set to Decoder see AV2 L1 n on page 155 Playing your recordings on other DVD players DVD VR DVD Video DVD R DVD RW Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in DVD R RW Video mode and DVD R discs A number of players including many Pioneer models can also play DVD RW discs recorded in VR mode finalized or not Most players will not play VR mode DVD R discs although some DVD ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to finalization might be necessary Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play When you finaliz
300. side facing up using the disc tray guide to align the disc if you re loading a double sided DVD disc load it with the side you want to play face down 8 gt Press to start playback Press to stop playback E You can resume playback from the same point by pressing gt Press W again to cancel the resume function Pauses playback or restarts playback n when paused PR p ess to start scanning Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed See Basic playback on page 103 for more on playing discs VOL 9 aE Adjust the volume Listening to a CD RECEIVER 1 Switch on the receiver subwoofer 2 Set the remote control to HDD DVR mode See Choosing and operating a source component on page 28 SOURCE 3 Switch on the HDD DVD recorder 4 ET Press to select DVD Load a CD and start playback page 104 VOL 6 seem Adjust the volume Watching a title recorded on the HDD RECEIVER 1 Switch on the receiver subwoofer 2 Set the remote control to HDD DVR mode See Choosing and operating a source component on page 28 SOURCE 3 Switch on the HDD DVD recorder TV 4 Switch on your TV 5 BT Press to select HDD 6 Start playback of the HDD title page 104 VOL 7 um Adjust the volume Listening to the radio RECEIVER 1 Switch on the receiver subwoofer 2 Set the remote control to FM AM mode See Choosing and operating a source component on
301. st titles accidently If you do need to edit it you can always unlock it later A Important You can t undo any edits made before changing the lock status You also can t undo a lock unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu Highlight the title you want to move Select Edit Move from the command menu panel d Disc Navigator DVD E unte 3 23 00 FRI 3 12 Ld WW 23 00 Fri 3 12 P Title Name Set Thumbnail ZOOONERINSUMONE iEruseecHon Divide EE 20 00 Fri 3 12 P Chapter Edit g 22 00 THU 2 12 Combine Li 22 00 Thu 2 12 F Cancel 1 Highlight the title you want to lock or unlock Select Edit gt Lock from the command menu panel Ed Disc Navigator HDD E ES n 19 00 MON 29 11 NES 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr 4 Mo 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP 23 00 Fri 3 12 Prd SHE Name EO 1h00m 1 06 4 Titles Set Thumbnail Oh30m Erase Section Divide Chapter Edit C 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr NES 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr Recent first 4 Set Genre e aad Ud 3 Vx Select a new position for the title All Genres i Caneel Title to move 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr2 SP 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP ih00m 1 0G DD SP Remain 30h30m 10Titles An unlocked title will become locked a locked title will be unlocked Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a pad
302. surface as doing so may cause the speaker to fall and cause damage or bodily injury All speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded However depending on the installation location colour distortion may occur if a speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a television set If this happens turn the power switch of the television set OFF and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min If the problem persists place the speaker system away from the television set For safety make sure that there is no exposed bare speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other amplifier This may result in malfunction or fire Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system The speaker system grill cannot be removed Do not try to forcibly remove it since doing so may damage the grille When cleaning the cabinet use the provided cleaning cloth Do not allow alcohol thinner benzene or insecticides to come into contact with the surface since finish discoloration may occur Also when using chemically impregnated cleaning cloths follow their precautions carefully 02 Connecting up Chapter 2 Connecting up Receiver subwoofer R L FRONT CENTER FRONT SURROUND SUBWOOFER bin C3 ESIE3 3 Ec 63 FM UNBAL 75 O Rear panel 1 HDMI OUT connector Connect to a television that has an HDMI ter
303. surround speakers for a wraparound effect t 3 confirm Adjust the setting then press ENTER to Center image setting When listening to two channel sources in Neo 6 Music mode see page 31 you can also adjust the center image effect Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals 1 Souno Press when Neo 6 Music mode is active Em 2 Select Center Image then press ENTER 3 Adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm e Adjust the effect from 0 all center channel sent to front right and left speakers to 10 center channel sent to the center speaker only Using Advanced Surround The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects These modes are designed to provide optimum listening effect when using the Standard surround setup described on page 6 Press to select an Advanced Surround mode The ADV SURR indicator lights when one of these modes is chosen You cannot switch between modes for some audio streams Press repeatedly to select Action Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks Drama Designed for movies with lots of dialog Sci Fi Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects Mono Film Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks 1 As this product uses a dual center speaker system you should normally use the
304. t or Display Mode then press ENTER to see the available view options Data Format CD Displays tracks on an Audio CD WMA MP3 Displays WMA MPS3 folders or tracks DivX Displays DivX folders or titles Display Mode Folder Switches to the folder display for WMA MP3 or DivX files Track Switches to the track display for WMA MP3 files Title Switches to the title display for DivX files 3 Choose a view option then press ENTER The title list display is updated according to the new display preferences Scanning discs ALL You can scan discs at various speeds forwards or backwards 1 ea gS LCD page 7 During playback start reverse or forward scanning e The scanning speed is shown on screen 2 e ea Press repeatedly to change the scanning speed There are four scanning speeds available when playing HDD video a DVD or a DivX title Reverse playback is also possible with HDD and DVD Video There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc 3 gt Resume normal playback 1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Disc Navigator screen while the recorder is reloading files 2 e No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles 3 Reverse playback may not be smooth e No sound is output when scanning from the HDD DVDs and DivX except on forward SCAN 1 e Depending on the disc normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reache
305. t 3 Press then select Erase from the command menu panel e Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel e You can also just press CLEAR LCD page 2 when the timer programme is highlighted Skipping a regular timer programme If you ve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled recording 1 Press TIMER REC LCD page 7 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to skip Note gt 3 Press then select Cancel Once from the command menu panel e Inthe timer programme list Cancel Once appears by the programme e You can also just press IM Pause LCD page 7 when the timer programme is highlighted Checking for alternative broadcast times UK only You can check to see if a programme you have scheduled to record is airing at an alternative time slot 1 Press TIMER REC LCD page 7 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search 4 cen 3 Press then select Alternate Search from the command menu panel e The search results are displayed Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording Searching for series UK only You can search for broadcasts of programmes of the same series as a programme you have scheduled to record 1 Press TIMER REC LCD page 7 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search 4 gt 3 Press
306. t several titles then select a command that will be applied to all of them In this way you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at once for example Select Multi Mode from the command menu panel e Disc Navigator HDD 10Titles g 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr4 S 23 00 Fri 3 12 Pr4 S 10 a p Play Erase Edit 4 Titles PN 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr9 S d NE 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr9 S Recent first Genre Name a3 A 22 00 THU 2 12 Pr7 amp if 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr7 All Genres l eee NN 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr 2 SP 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP SP a RE 2 ih00m 1 08 30h30m Select the command that you want applied to all the marked titles For example select Erase to erase all the marked titles 2 Disc Navigator HDD 1 Multi Mode 10Titles 23 00 FRI 3 12 Pr4 S E mes Lock 4 Titles Unlock Ba 20 00 FRI 3 12 Pr9 Change Genre EE 20 00 Fri 3 12 Pr9 9 Recent first j a 1 v 22 00 THU 2 12 Pr7 Single Mode Isl i 22 00 Thu 2 12 Pr7 All Genres 19 00 MON 29 11 Pr 2 SP 19 00 Mon 29 11 Pr2 SP DD SP Remain Ld 1h00m 1 0G 30h30m Once the command is completed Multi Mode is automatically exited Undo DVD Video DVD VR DVD R DVD RW If you make a mistake while editing you can generally undo it There is one level of undo in other words you can only undo the last edit you made Select
307. tart the MHEG application display UK only if available during digital broadcasts 26 CHANNEL page 93 Press to change the channel of the built in TV tuner 27 AUDIO page 94 111 Press to change the audio language or channel When the recorder is stopped press to change the tuner audio SUBTITLE page 111 Press to display change the subtitles included in multilingual DVD Video discs While watching D TV press to change the D TV subtitles amp ANGLE page 112 Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi angle scenes 28 DISP page 112 Displays changes the on screen information displays 29 O T COPY page 127 Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD K Controls and displays Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs First refer to Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 47 for information about setting up your TV s presets Note that certain buttons may not work with some TVs TELETEXT related buttons can only be used with Pioneer plasma televisions TV 1 2 Shown when not set to a Pioneer plasma television 1 9 2 PDP 2 2 1 OTV Switches the TV to On Standby TV CTRL Switches the remote control to the TV operating mode no effect on the current input source of this unit 2 SOURCE Switches the power for the TV to On Standby 3 PAGE lt gt Switches pages on the LCD touch screen 4
308. tch them off if necessary e Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic If this seems to be happening switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup 3 If this doesn t work press MCACC turn off the power and check the problem indicated by the Error message then try the Auto MCACC setup again 4 If Complete doesn t appear it is likely an error occurred during the setup Please check all connections and try again 5 See Listening with MCACC Effect on page 34 to switch on off MCACC Effect Listening to your system Chapter 6 Listening to your system A Important e Press to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer make sure that the LCD displays the RECEIVER screen as shown below RECEIVER F S SURR Effective Sound for optimum sound With the uniquely shaped high quality speakers supplied with this unit the Effective Sound mode enables the following Pioneer exclusive audio technologies designed to maximize the real experience of sound originally inherent in movies and music Turn on the Effective Sound mode under normal circumstances to maximize the capabilities of this unit Dialogue Enhancement Clarifies dialogue in movies to make it stand out from other background sounds Dynamic Range Compression Resuscitates detailed sound susceptible to ambient noise to create an acoustic environment where you feel as if you are right i
309. tefacts visible in areas of flat colour caused by MPEG compression MNR Adjusts the amount of noise reduction NR applied to the mosquito noise artefacts visible around the edges of an image caused by MPEG compression Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of the high frequency detailed elements in the picture Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output Detail Adjusts how sharp edges appear White Level Adjusts the intensity of white White Level is ineffective for HDMI output Black Level Adjusts the intensity of black Black Level is ineffective for HDMI output Black Setup Corrects the standard reference black level Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output Gamma Correction Adjusts the brightness of darker images Gamma Correction is ineffective for HDMI output Hue Adjusts overall balance between red and green Hue is ineffective for HDMI output Chroma Level Adjusts how rich the colours appear Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output 4 Use the buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting 5 When you have all the settings as you want them press HOME MENU to exit The Initial Setup menu Chapter 15 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound picture language and so on Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopp
310. ten to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic or DTS Neo 6 decoding modes If you set up the system for Front surround page 6 the Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results see page 33 surel Press repeatedly to select a listening mode The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source that s playing 1 After the surround back signals of the 6 1 7 1 channel audio represented by DTS ES are properly decoded the original virtual surround back function outputs the surround back signals in combination with surround signals 2 You cannot select a mode other than Auto and Stereo while playing back DTS HD DTS Express or Dolby TrueHD 176 4 kHz 192 kHz Also you cannot select DTS Neo 6 for Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueH D below 96 kHz KO Listening to your system With two channel sources you can select from e Auto Auto listening mode see page 31 e DOPL II Movie Dolby Pro Logic II Movie 5 1 channel surround sound especially suited to movie sources e DOPL II Music Dolby Pro Logic Il Music 5 1 channel surround sound especially suited to music sources see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below e DOPL Il Game Dolby Pro Logic Il Game 5 1 channel surround sound especially suited to video games DOPro Logic
311. tended by the creator of music or movies DTS is a registered trademark of DIS Inc and DTS HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS Inc Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions If you think that there is something wrong with this component check the points below Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work e f the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions e fthere is no sound or no multichannel sound from the SDVR LX70D HDD DVD recorder try setting the recorder s audio related settings back to their defaults see The nitial Setup menu on page 152 General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on or Leave the unit plugged in wait for one minute then switch back on switches off suddenly an error Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit This could cause the message may be displayed at system to shut off automatically startup Or the display Check that the speakers are connected correctly disappears suddenly and no Make sure there is enough space for ventilation ar
312. ter or your dealer to carry out repair work General Problem Remedy Can t eject a disc e Turn off the power to this device and press and hold amp OPEN CLOSE on the front of the recorder for more than three seconds Can t play a disc Check that the disc is a compatible format disc page 58 Take out the disc and clean it page 174 Check that the disc is loaded properly aligned in disc tray and label side up Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder Press HDD DVD LCD page 7 to select the DVD There may be condensation in the recorder Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate During HDD recording you can t play discs that are recorded with a Line System different to the current recorder setting e DVD R RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy once protected recordings will not play in this recorder Can t record a disc Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc page 58 Check that the disc is loaded properly aligned with the disc tray with the label side facing up Remove the disc from the disc tray and clean it page 174 e Some DVD RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized page 102 This can take up to an hour Remote control does not If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack point work the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwo
313. tering all the timer recording information CH Choose a channel Pr 1 to Pr 99 for analog highlight Store Programme and press ENTER channels and available digital channels excluding A red clock icon appears for the programme skip channels or an external input to record from e Date Choose a date upto one month in advance or 6 Press to exit the Digital EPG screen select a daily or weekly programme Start Set the recording start time ie Tip e Stop Set the recording end time maximum length of a timer recording is 24 hours e To enter a title name for the timer recording in advance select Set Title Name and follow the on screen display Extend Extend the end time of the timer recording select Off 10 20 or 30 mins 4 Ifyou want to change the recording mode recording destination etc select Set Detailed In this area you can set Record to Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD for DVD recording Recording Mode Select from AUTO XP SP LP EP SLP SEP see Setting the picture quality recording time on page 95 If Manual Recording is on then you can also select the LPCM setting XP or MN press ENTER then use the amp buttons to select the level kA Note 1 You cannot change the CH Date Start Stop Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On see below 2 Fora DVD timer recording if Optimized Rec see Optimized Rec on page 157 is set to On and VPS
314. than one second However this will make the disc unusable although if you are using a DVD RW or DVD RW disc you can re initialize it in order to make it usable again see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 102 7 After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc you can select whether to make another backup of the same data or exit 2 Disc Back up Disc back up finished To make another back up copy please load a recordable disc e Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel to finish If you want to make another backup copy return to step 6 above 8 Ifyou don t need to keep the backup data on the HDD you can delete it now Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD select No to keep it you can delete it later if you want to 2 Disc Back up The backed up data is still on the HDD Erasing it will increase the free space available OK to Erase Yes f you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD you can make backup copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back up menu 11 Using the Jukebox Chapter 11 Using the Jukebox The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder s HDD to store and playback music from your CDs You can also transfer WMA MP3 files stored on CD R RW ROM DVD USB device or PC Copying music to the HDD The first step is to copy some music to the HDD CD audio WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed Usua
315. the Home Menu DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VIR mode with a tape loaded Playing and recording from a DV camcorder C x Select Record to Hard Disk Drive or Record to DVD 6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from For best results pause playback at the point from which you want to record Depending on your camcorder you can use this recorder s remote to control the camcorder using the E gt il lt lt gt gt all and I gt buttons LCD page 7 lt Start Rec Pause Rec Stop Rec HDD SP 2h00m DVD Rem 32h45m You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on screen display You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately HDD DVD VR Mode and DVD RAM only A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted for example f you don t want to see the DV recording screen during recording press DISP LCD page 3 to hide it press again to display While recording you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME MENU or R
316. the file for which you would like to see detailed information 2 Choose Detailed Information When no detailed information is available nothing is displayed Printing files Connecting a PictBridge compatible printer to the USB port will enable you to print out picture files stored on the HDD a CD DVD or directly from a digital camera Make sure that the printer and your digital camera if you are using that as a source is connected to the recorder before starting 1 Q Select the file s you want to print e To print multiple files use the Multi Mode see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 148 Display the command menu Start Slideshow 002 PIOROO01 Start Audio Slideshow 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOROO03 005 PIOROO04 Copy to DVD PAIGE 006 PIOROO05 Detailed Information 007 PIOROO06 Multi Mode 008 PIOROO07 009 PIOROO08 010 PIOROO09 HDD t1 PIOR0010 012 PIOROO11 cancel Once printing has started you can cancel by pressing ENTER E tip e Paper size and layout can be set the options available depend on your printer check the printer manual for details his recorder may not work correctly with all printers 1 Picture files should be standard DCF format Non standard files may not print properly The Disc Setup menu GES Chapter 13 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure initialize a
317. title Select to display special additional assistive subtitles where available Some discs may override these settings Recording Manual Recording On go to setup All the standard recording modes plus MN1 to MN32 LPCM and XP modes can be set Off o Just the standard recording modes XP SP LP EP SLP and SEP can be set See also Manual recording modes on page 164 for detailed information on manual recording levels Optimized Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting If the recording will not fit even at MN1 MNA for DVD R RW then the recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected Off e When a timer recording is set that won t fit on to the selected media the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set It cannot be used together with VPS PDC Subtitle Recording On The selected subtitle language is recorded with the D TV timer recording Off e No subtitles are recorded with D TV timer recordings Set Thumbnail 0 seconds e Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of the title 30 seconds Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title 3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into th
318. towards your TV and press SOURCE to check that the remote works with your TV If the remote is set up correctly the TV should switch off If it doesn t and there is another code given for your maker repeat step 1 with a new code ess of this setting D DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer 11 Additional information TV Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using PETITES Te 016 88 e e 516 AIWA 006 AKAI 008 010 ALBA 011 BESTER 015 BLAUPUNKT 016 017 BLUE SKY 018 BRANDT 019 BUSH 022 CLATRONIC 023 DAEWOO 035 036 037 DUAL 039 040 FERGUSON 048 048 050 FIRSTLINE 051 FISHER 053 FRABA 054 FUNAI 056 058 059 GOLDSTAR 070 GOODMANS 071 072 073 GRUNDIG 074 075 076 ICE 084 IRRADIO 085 ITT 086 087 JVC 093 094 095 096 KENDO 098 LOEWE 103 104 105 MARK 116 MATSUI 117 118 MEDION 119 MITSUBISHI 123 124 125 MIVER 127 NEC 130 NOKIA 086 087 132 133 134 135 136 NORDMENDE 137 138 139 OCEANIC 135 136 OKANO 140 ONWA 141 PANASONIC 146 147 PHILIPS 155 PHONOLA 157 RADIO 163 RADIOLA 168 SABA 176 177 178 179 180 SAMSUNG 185 186 SANYO 190 191 192 193 194 SCHNEIDER 199 200 201 202 SHARP 208 209 SIEMENS 212 SO
319. tyle Sort order or Genre then press ENTER to see the available view options e Style Select four or eight titles per screen view Sort order Sort by date most recent first unwatched first title name or recording date oldest first Genre Display all genres or just a selected genre 3 Choose a view option then press ENTER The title list display is updated according to the new display preferences Playback Using the Disc Navigator with playback only discs Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback DVD Video VideoCD Super VCD HDD 1 J Select DVD 2 Display the Home Menu Select Disc Navigator Alternatively fora Video CD or Super VCD you can press DISC NAVIGATOR which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen Select what you want to play Depending on the type of disc you have loaded the Disc Navigator looks slightly different but they are all navigated in the same way The screen below shows a Video CD Navigate to the track chapter title that you want to play Disc Navigator Track01 Track 01 99 A Total 0 50 50 Video CD Track01 Track02 Track03 Track04 Track05 Track06 Track07 Track08 LL E v Playback starts after you press ENTER CD WMA MP3 DivX HDD 1 Pa Select DVD 2 NAVIGATOR Open the Disc Navigator he Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home
320. u can change if you need to See HDMI Output only available when an HDMI device is connected on page 159 for more information Note that the HDMI settings remain in effect until you change them or connect a new HDMI component A Important An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI equipped components compatible with both DVI and High bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP If you choose to connect to a DVI connector you will need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable A DVI to HDCP connection however does not support audio Consult your local audio dealer for more information The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 96 kHz 16 bit 20 bit 24 bit 2 channel linear PCM signals as well as Dolby Digital DIS and MPEG audio bitstream If your connected component is only compatible with Linear PCM the signal is output as Linear PCM DTS audio is not output If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma television please select the HDMI setup on the display refer to the supplied manual for more on this About HDMI HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players and recorders DIV set top boxes and other AV devices HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High bandwidth Digital Content Protec tion HDCP as well as Digital Visual Interface DVI in one specification HDCP is used to protect digital content
321. ugh free space on the HDD for optimization to complete properly Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize again e An error occurred Please consult the service This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot center Note that contents on the HDD may be be read The HDD may be damaged or broken Please ask your erased when servicing this unit nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs e The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect Use the As the HDD info cannot be properly read no new recordings can be Disc Setup menu to reinitialize made Reinitializing the HDD page 148 may result in your being able to make recording again Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents including protected files e This signal s TV system is different from the The TV system PAL NTSC etc of the current channel is different recorder s setting from the TV system settings of this recorder e Recording failed due to a TV system The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set mismatch Press DISPLAY to clear message for recording was different from the setting of the recorder e Playback has stopped because the TV system During recording or timer recording standby the TV System PAL is different than the recording NTSC etc of the playback video changed causing playback to stop automatically You are not allowed to watch this A CA modul
322. umption in standby mode 0 69 W Front panel display off Weight ET 5 5 kg Dimensions 420 mm W x 80 mm H x 286 mm D Operating temperature 0008 5 Cto 435 C Operating humidity 5 96 to 85 96 no condensation TV system ucc NTSC external input only PAL SECAM Readable discs DVD Video DVD RW DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM Video CD Super VCD CD CD R RW WMA MP3 JPEG CD DA DivX Recording discs and formats DVD R RW VR mode and Video mode DVD R RW VR mode DVD RAM VR mode DVD R DL VR mode and Video mode DVD R DL VR mode Video recording format Sampling TEOCHSTTON sca ida dca abe esp eee eee we da 13 0 MHz Compression TOMA s s a rasane a Ce so eae aes MPEG Audio recording format Sampling OHIO a 2 4 4 95 fbr og T CE o e deed 48 kHz Compression format Dolby Digital or Linear PCM uncompressed Recording time HDD 250 GB T TrTLT PITT Approx 36 h Fine AP eaer encina ne dee k eau ee ada Approx 53 h Standard Play SP ac asew hase dh edd aa ee Approx 106 h ONG Flay LP ra 6oeenee tiered e ER EORR Approx 212 h Extended Play EP ce dv utn do E d Approx 319 h S per Long PISFOOLDPI us ses cra ox og xp de Approx 425 h Super Extended Play SEP 00 Approx 532 h Manual Mode MN 000 Approx 36 h to 711 h DVD R RW DVD R RW DVD RAM uiti earne ras tae Gd wok Gara la Pace ve ee eG Approx 1 h Standard Play SP cut etse aw e
323. ure at all In this case press amp OPEN CLOSE while holding down the W Stop button on the front panel to switch the setting 4 3 Video Output Full Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio Normal Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio 4 3 video will be shown with bars on each side Colour RGB 0 255 Use if colours are weak and black appears to float on the RGB 16 235 setting RGB 16 235 Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the RGB 0 255 setting YCbCr 4 2 2 The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4 2 2 component signal This is the standard setting for HDMI compatible devices YCbCr 4 4 4 The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4 4 4 component signal Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available e When a DVI device is connected the YCbCr 4 2 2 and YCbCr 4 4 4 options are not available Audio Output Auto e Dolby Digital MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal However depending on the Audio Out setting number of audio channels and the HDMI connected device Linear PCM audio may be output PCM All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM except DTS Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected HDMI Control One Enable the HDMI Control function Select this option when using to an HDMI Contr
324. using ver 1 1 discs The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders limited compatibility with DVD RW ver 1 2 discs Model MEVEL 3 Recordable V DVR 3100 DVR 5100H Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play Cannot read the CPRM information wil show in the display when you load a disc However this will not affect playback i Copy once protected disc titles will not play Readable file system This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the following file systems ISO 9660 UDF 1 02 UDF 1 50 UDF 2 00 UDF 2 01 ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder 1 Depending on the recording technique used even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly e MP3 WMA or ISO 9660 fi DivX files can be played back when recorded onto a e systems DV D that contains no video titles and uses the UDF 1 02 UDF 1 50 UDF 2 01 END Before you start HDD DVD Recording and playback compatibility This recorder can play and record all widely used DVD disc types and additionally provides HDD functionality The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types DVD RW DVD R Magi usc A A HDD DVD VR DVD Video DVD VR DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM f M x2
325. ws at Ten The Secret it v 2 Football Gan Emmerdale Homes Polic gt 1 Video window Allows you to continue watching the current programme while using the GUIDE Plus system 2 Information panels Display programme promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus system 3 Action bar Colour coded Action buttons change function depending on the area 4 Information box Shows short programme descriptions or help menus 5 Menu bar Gives access to the various areas of the GUIDE Plus system 6 Grid Shows TV listings information for the next seven days by channel and time 1 The GUIDE Plus system can t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System see also nput Line System on page 152 Using the GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide Cn GUIDE Plus navigation The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons you ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus system Key What it does Press to set or cancel One Button Recording LCD Page 1 Action buttons that change functionality depending on the Area RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE Press to display the GUIDE Plus screen also use to exit Use to navigate screens highlight an item MENU Press to jump directly to the Menu bar Press to go directly to the Schedule area xd mm ar IM E D Page 1 Press to display extended information for the current programme Press to confirm a selection or to leave t
326. y prevent proper cooling of the system unit X Place on an unstable surface or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unit s feet Additional information Surround sound formats Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you ll find on DVDs satellite cable and terrestrial broadcasts and video cassettes Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below See www dolby com for more detailed information DO boLBY TRUEZ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks It can deliver upto six discrete audio channels comprising five full range channels and a special LFE low frequency effects channel used mainly for deep rumbling sound effects hence the term 5 1 channel Dolby Digital In addition to the format features above Dolby Digital decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates and channels Another feature called Dialog Normalization attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak level also known as Dialnorm in order to achieve uniform playback level Dolby Pro Logic Il and Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic Il and Dolby Pro Logic decoding system Using the innovative steering logic
327. y List Continue Using Previous Copy List Create New Copy List e f you select Continue Using Previous Copy List skip to step 10 below e Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder Add titles to the Copy List highlight a title and press ENTER to add 8 WED 29 03 20 00 Wed29 03 Pr2 SP Pr2 5 7n MON 27 03 21 00 Mon27 03 Pr4 SP Pr4 Back 6 SAT 25 03 23 00 Sat25 03 Pro SP Pr9 Recent first c 5 THU 23 03 22 00 Thu23 03 Pr6 SP Pr6 IN 4 WED 22 03 20 00 Wed 22 03 Pr2 SP Pr2 S d MON 20 03 13 00 Mon20 03 Pr9 SP Pr9 Next All Genres 2 FRI 103 20 00 Fri 17 03 PA SP Pr4 1 WED 15 03 20 00 Wed15 03 Pr2 SP TE 20 00 Wed29 03 Pr2 SP 4 20 00 1h00m 2 0G Pr2 Sia Sports SP 0 06 ME 436 CA Copy List Total Current DVD Remain Titles you ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink Note 1 The following titles cannot be copied at high speed for DV e Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6 SEP SLP or EP mode The following titles cannot be copied at high speed for DV D R RW D R RW Video Mode and There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD R RW Video mode or DVD R RW When adding titles that contain copy once protected material the copy once parts will not be added When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio screen size each part with a different
328. y not You can t enter a timer programme if the clock isn t set What happens when two or more timer programmes overlap Basically the programme with the earlier recording start time has priority However the recorder will start recording the programme with the later start time after the earlier programme is finished If schedule to record two programmes have the same times but different channels for example then only one of the two programmes will be recorded In this event you should cancel the scheduled recording of the lesser important programme If one of the overlapping programmes is a regular timer programme for a digital broadcast you may choose Cancel Once in order to avoid having it overlap with a separately scheduled programme see Skipping a regular timer programme on page 89 NE Ceris OOOO O Simultaneous recording and playback Chase Play HDD Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in progress from the start without having to wait until the recording has finished i e playback is chasing the recording In fact you re not just limited to watching the recording in progress You can watch anything else already on the HDD or on a DVD if you re recording to the HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 106 Chase Play is not possible when DV isthe recording input e em
329. y not play even page 158 finalized DL discs 11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM n EM 12 CPRM compatible discs only This logo indicates that the disc IS a DVD R DL Or 13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use Only Panasonic and DVD R DL disc Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder Discs from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited 14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time nor DYD increase the number of recordable titles left ROC 15 Must be compatible with DVD R playback RDE Ee 16 Depending on the disc it may have to be initialized before it can be recorded page 147 In this case initialization will take about an hour DVD js a trademark of DVD Format Logo Licensing Corporation Before you start Correct operation has been confirmed for DL discs e DVD R DL ver 3 0 2x to 4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Verbatim DVD R DL ver 3 0 2x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Verbatim hat s JVC e DVD R DL 2 4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Verbatim RICOH e DVD R DL 2 4x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Verbatim RICOH About DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two sided disc one side of which contains DVD content video audio etc while the other side contains non DVD content such as digital audio material The non DVD audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD audio specification and therefore may not
330. y the pictures stored on this recorder on your plasma television to improve the situations e Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or not Certain functions are not supported on with plasma televisions We cannot guarantee this recorder will work with HDMI Control compatible components other than those made by Pioneer When using HDMI Control compatible components manufactured by companies other than Pioneer set the HDMI Control to Off page 159 If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working e Press IM Stop then try restarting playback e Press the front panel STANDBY ON button to switch the power off then switch back on and restart playback If the power fails to switch off press and hold STANDBY ON for five seconds until the 5 sm usce eee power switches off S eB nO 5 STANDBY ON ED Additional information On screen displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning Message Explanation Action Initializing disc Please wait a moment When you load a blank DVD RW or DVD RW dis
331. y to receive new codes overnight used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or analog cable without a set top box Now have upgraded to a satellite system or to digital cable with external receiver What should do to receive data for the GUIDE Plus system You can try to receive your Host Channel through your new reception method If you have problems to receive data we recommend that you keep your analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive data this way It is important that you identify your Host Channel correctly in the Editor Area After I performed the initial set up found that the line up for all the channels received via the external set top box is incorrect How do I correct this You can change the line up in the editor according to your preferences Access the Editor Area Select the channels that you would like to change Change the source and preset number according to your preferences performed the set up but after many hours I still have a blank EPG what is going wrong There are several possibilities Connections are wrong See Recorder connections on page 62 to double check everything The initial setup of GUIDE Plus was completed incorrectly Try setting it up again see Setting up the GUIDE Plus system on page 71 Your cabling and setup is OK but the recorder has not been connected for enough time to receive the TV l
332. you highlight a programme in the Grid you can see information about it in the Information Box including title synopsis channel source time and length If there is an i symbol in the Information Box it means that there is an extended synopsis available Press the INFO button to see it In some countries you can also see a rating for a particular programme mostly movies These ratings are provided by local partners such as TV magazines From the Grid Area you can e View and scroll through programme listings Read programme synopses e Tune to a programme that s currently showing e Set a programme to record Lock or unlock the video window Access Information panels Browsing the Grid Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid t cursor buttons Navigate the Grid I CD page f Previous next page lt gt LCD page 1 Previous next day BLUE Action button Return to the current time date in the Grid ENTER Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE Plus system and start watching the programme The Search Area From the Search Area you can e Search by category e Search by subcategory e Search by keyword Read programme synopses une to a programme that s currently showing e Set a programme to record Access Information panels 1 If you re using an external tuner satellite tuner for example there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while
333. ze Disc Name High Speed Finalize off Copy List Total Current DVD Remain Start Copy 436 L 1 436 Cd If you re using a DVD R DL or DVD R DL disc and the copy will span both layers the Copy List Total bar will be purple he Current DVD Remain bar will be half length if the first layer of a DVD R DL or DVD R DL disc is already full Copying and backup m Copying from DVD to HDD A Important e he DVD to HDD Copy screen isn t accessible when 4 a finalized Video mode DVD R RW or a DVD Video is loaded As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected you can still use the One Touch Copy function however see One Touch Copy on page 127 The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time The Copy List will be erased if any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited the disc tray is opened playback is switched between Play List and Original the DVD disc is re initialized or finalized the recorder is reset to its factory settings see Resetting the recorder on page 175 It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC Select Copy from the Home Menu Select DVD CD gt HDD Select a Copy List type Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder Add titles to the Copy List highlight a title and pres

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ビッグオーブントースター DOT-1402  Ver catálogo  掘取機 VH1402  Formación con VDE  Istruzioni montaggio S45 - Porta Pallet Serie 85-110  Mod.BebéDue - ST016-14V1  cabo passante super  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file